Using Your Treo™ 700P Smartphone
Welcome................................................................................................... 1
What’s in the box?.......................................................................................................2
What do I need to get started?...................................................................................3
Setting up your smartphone and computer ......................................... 4
Treo™ 700P smartphone overview ............................................................................4
Installing the battery ...................................................................................................7
Charging the battery ...................................................................................................8
Making your first call ................................................................................................12
Setting up your computer ........................................................................................15
Synchronizing information—the basics ..................................................................22
Moving around on your smartphone................................................... 24
Moving around the screen .......................................................................................24
Using the keyboard...................................................................................................30
Opening applications................................................................................................33
Using your phone .................................................................................. 36
Turning your smartphone on and off......................................................................36
Making calls...............................................................................................................40
Receiving calls...........................................................................................................46
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
iii
Using voicemail.........................................................................................................47
Viewing minutes usage ............................................................................................58
Defining favorite buttons..........................................................................................59
Using a phone headset.............................................................................................63
Customizing phone settings.....................................................................................69
What are all those icons?..........................................................................................80
Using email ............................................................................................ 84
The Wireless Sync application.................................................................................85
The VersaMail application........................................................................................93
Using other wireless features............................................................... 97
Messaging..................................................................................................................97
Web browser ...........................................................................................................113
BroadbandAccess Connect.....................................................................................127
Connections with Bluetooth devices .....................................................................133
Playing media files .............................................................................. 138
Camera and Camcorder..........................................................................................138
Pics&Videos.............................................................................................................145
Pocket Tunes™........................................................................................................153
Staying organized................................................................................ 163
Contacts ...................................................................................................................163
Calendar...................................................................................................................167
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
iv
Tasks ........................................................................................................................177
Memos .....................................................................................................................182
Staying productive .............................................................................. 183
®
Documents To Go Professional...........................................................................183
Voice Memo.............................................................................................................185
Calculator.................................................................................................................187
World Clock..............................................................................................................189
Managing files and applications ........................................................ 191
Using Find................................................................................................................191
Installing applications.............................................................................................192
Removing applications ...........................................................................................195
Viewing application info.........................................................................................196
Sending information with Bluetooth wireless technology..................................198
Beaming information..............................................................................................201
Synchronizing information—advanced.................................................................204
Using expansion cards ...........................................................................................215
Customizing your smartphone........................................................... 221
System sound settings ...........................................................................................221
Display and appearance settings...........................................................................223
Applications settings...............................................................................................228
Locking your smartphone and info........................................................................232
System settings.......................................................................................................243
Connection settings ................................................................................................245
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
v
Troubleshooting................................................................................... 246
Upgrading................................................................................................................246
Resetting your smartphone....................................................................................249
Replacing the battery..............................................................................................252
Screen ......................................................................................................................254
Synchronization.......................................................................................................256
Phone .......................................................................................................................265
Hands-free devices..................................................................................................268
Email ........................................................................................................................269
Messaging................................................................................................................270
Web ..........................................................................................................................272
Camera.....................................................................................................................276
Making room on your Treo smartphone...............................................................277
Third-party applications..........................................................................................278
Error messages........................................................................................................280
Where to learn more............................................................................ 281
For a quick introduction..........................................................................................281
While using your Treo smartphone.......................................................................281
If you need more information ................................................................................282
Glossary................................................................................................ 283
Regulatory information....................................................................... 287
Index ..................................................................................................... 301
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
vi
Welcome
Congratulations on the purchase of your Treo™ 700P smartphone! In
one compact and indispensable device, you now have all of the
following:
Tip
LOOK HERE: Don’t
miss the helpful tips
and cross-references
given in this column.
•
•
•
An advanced mobile smartphone 700P
Mobile email (corporate and personal)
Did You Know?
The Verizon Wireless
business-to-business
sales channel offers a
Treo 700P smartphone
without a camera. If
you purchased your
smartphone from this
channel, check the
High-speed Internet connection and data transfer with
NationalAccess and BroadbandAccess support
•
A Palm OS® organizer with portable expansion capability
(MultiMediaCard/SD/SDIO)
•
•
•
•
A 1.3-megapixel digital camera (camera version only)
Text and multimedia messaging
A media player
packaging to see if
your smartphone
includes a camera.
Productivity software
This guide helps you set up your Treo smartphone and quickly learn to
use it.
[ * ] NOTE Phone and text messaging services require a service
contract with Verizon Wireless. Web, email, and multimedia messaging
services require a service contract and high-speed data service from
Verizon Wireless. Data speeds vary based on network availability and
capacity.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
1
What’s in the box?
You should have received all the following items in the Treo
smartphone box:
Hardware
•
•
•
•
•
Treo smartphone
Rechargeable battery
AC charger
USB sync cable
Headset
Documentation and software
•
•
•
•
Read This First poster
Quick Reference Guide
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone (this guide)
Palm Software Installation CD, which includes:
•
•
Palm® Desktop software
Bonus software for your smartphone
•
•
Welcome CD, which includes the Treo 700P Smartphone Interactive
User Guide
Palm warranty
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
2
What do I need to get started?
As you work through the instructions in this guide, you’ll need all the
items that came in the Treo 700P smartphone box (see What’s in the
box?), as well as the following:
•
•
•
•
An activated Verizon Wireless account*
A location with wireless coverage for your smartphone
An electrical outlet
The computer with which you want to synchronize your personal
information
•
The Palm Software Installation CD included in the box
[ * ] NOTE To use email, web browsing, or multimedia messaging,
your Verizon Wireless service plan must include data services.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
3
Treo™ 700P smartphone overview
Front view
Tip
Protectyour screen. Be
careful to store your
smartphone away
from items that might
scratch or crush the
screen. Visit
to find carrying cases
and other useful
accessories.
Indicator light (phone
and charge indicator)
Earpiece
5-way navigator
and Center button
Power/End button
Applications
button
Menu
button
Did You Know?
When your
Volume button
Side button
smartphone screen is
on, you can press and
hold the Side button to
open an application of
your choice; see
Reassigning buttons
for details.
Send button
Messaging
button
Phone
button
Calendar
button
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
5
Treo™ 700P smartphone overview
Back view
Battery door release
Self-portrait mirror
Camera lens
(camera
version only)
Speaker
Headset jack
Multi-
connector
Microphone
[ ! ] IMPORTANT The Treo smartphone speaker includes a large
magnet, so be sure to keep your smartphone away from credit cards or
other items that could be demagnetized.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
6
Installing the battery
Installing the battery
Tip
0
If your smartphone
does not turn on, you
need to connect it to
the AC charger. If it still
does not turn on after
you connect the AC
charger, then do a soft
reset. See Performing
a soft reset.
1. Use one hand to press the battery door release button and use
your other hand to slide the battery door downward to remove it
from your smartphone.
2. Align the metal contacts on the battery with the contacts inside the
battery compartment.
3. Insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, and
then press it into place.
4. Slide the battery door onto the back of the smartphone until it
clicks into place.
Tip
You can buy an extra
battery as a spare for
long airplane trips or
periods of heavy use.
To purchase batteries
that are compatible
with your smartphone,
go to www.palm.com/
5. When the language selection screen appears, select the language
you want to use.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT You must select the same language on your
smartphone and desktop software.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to set up your smartphone.
Battery door
release button
Battery
contacts
Smartphone
contacts
Notch
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
7
Charging the battery
Charging the battery
Tip
If the indicator light
does not turn on when
you connect your
smartphone to the AC
charger, double-check
the cable connection
and the electrical
outlet to which it is
connected.
The battery comes with a sufficient charge to complete the setup
process and activate your phone. After activation, we recommend
charging your smartphone for 3.5 hours (or until the indicator light is
solid green) to give it a full charge. See Maximizing battery life for tips
on maximizing the life of your smartphone’s battery.
0
1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
2. Connect the charger cable to the bottom of the smartphone. Make
sure the arrow on the connector is facing up, toward the screen.
Did You Know?
You can also charge
your smartphone by
connecting it to your
computer with the
sync cable. You can do
this with or without
using the charger
cable (see Connecting
your Treo smartphone
to your computer).
Tip
Keep in mind that it
takes longer to charge
the battery using the
sync cable, and if your
laptop isn’t plugged
into a power source, it
can drain the laptop’s
battery.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
8
Charging the battery
When your smartphone is on (see Turning your smartphone on and off),
the onscreen battery icon displays the charging status:
Tip
To see exactly how
much power is left in
your battery, tap the
onscreen battery icon.
A red lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected to a
wall outlet and is charging.
A green lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected
to a wall outlet and is fully charged.
Did You Know?
If your battery ever
becomes fully drained,
your info is still stored
safely on your
A partial battery without a lightning bolt indicates that the
battery is not connected to a wall outlet and it has some
power.
smartphone until you
recharge the battery or
connect your
An almost empty battery that is red at the bottom indicates
that you need to charge the battery immediately.
smartphone to a
power source.
Battery icon
Tip
To avoid draining the
battery, charge your
smartphone everyday,
especially if you use
your phone often.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
10
Charging the battery
Maximizing battery life
Battery life depends on how you use your smartphone. You can
maximize the life of your battery by following a few easy guidelines:
Battery consumption
varies based on
personal usage.
Consumption factors
include signal
strength,
speakerphone usage,
and screen brightness.
•
•
Charge your smartphone whenever you’re at your desk, or charge it
overnight. The Li-Ion battery has a much longer useful life when it is
Your smartphone’s wireless features (phone, email, messaging, and
web) and media features (camera, media players, eBooks, and
games) consume more power than its organizer features. If you
spend a lot of time using the wireless and media features, keep an
eye on the battery icon and charge when necessary.
Tip
If the battery is fully
drained, it may take a
few moments for the
indicator light to turn
on when you begin
charging.
•
•
If you don’t plan to use the wireless features on your smartphone
for a while, turn off your phone (see Turning your phone on and off)
and let all calls be picked up by voicemail.
As with any mobile phone, if you are in an area with no wireless
coverage, your smartphone searches for a signal, which consumes
power. If you cannot move to an area of better coverage,
temporarily turn off your phone. While your phone is off, you can
continue to use your smartphone’s nonwireless features.
•
•
Turn down the screen brightness (see Adjusting the brightness).
Decrease the settings in Power Preferences and turn off Beam
Receive (see Optimizing power settings).
•
Turn off the Bluetooth® feature if you’re not using it. See Connecting
to a Bluetooth headset or car kit.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
11
Making your first call
Making your first call
[
!
]
Before You Begin
0
If Phone Off appears in
the title bar, you need
to turn on your phone
(see Turning your
1. Press Phone
.
2. If prompted, press Center
to turn off Keyguard (see Locking
your keyboard (Keyguard) for more info).
phone on and off).
3. If you haven’t already activated your phone, follow these steps
before continuing:
If No Service appears
in the title bar, you are
outside a wireless
coverage area. If you
believe you are in a
wirelesscoveragearea
and this problem
persists, contact
Verizon Wireless for
assistance:
•
•
•
Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter 228.
*
Press Send
to dial.
When prompted, press 1 (this number appears on the E letter
key) to program your phone. A service provisioning message
appears on your smartphone screen.
•
Wait a few minutes until you see the Programming Successful!
message, and then tap the onscreen OK button. If the Ringer
switch is set to Sound On, you hear three tones when
programming is successful.
•
Verizon Wireless
technical support:
866-788-9387
•
Verizon Wireless
•
Press Power/End
to end the call.
customer service and
billing: 800-256-4646
4. Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the number you want to call.
Did You Know?
You can also dial
phone numbers with
the number pad on the
keyboard. See Dialing
using the keyboard for
details
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
12
Making your first call
5. Press Send
to dial.
6. After you finish the call, press Power/End
to end the call.
Adjusting call volume
While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your
smartphone to adjust the call volume.
•
•
•
To increase the volume, press the upper half of the Volume button.
To decrease the volume, press the lower half of the Volume button.
To accept your volume setting, press the Side button.
Volume button
Side button
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
13
Making your first call
What’s my phone number?
Tip
0
If your phone number
doesn’t appear in
Phone Info, follow the
steps under Making
your first call to
activate your phone.
Be sure to turn your
phone off and on again
before you recheck
Phone Info.
1. Make sure your phone is on (see Turning your phone on and off).
2. Press Phone
.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Options, and then select Phone Info.
Look here for
your phone
number
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
14
Setting up your computer
Setting up your computer
[
!
]
Before You Begin
To set up your
You can enter or change information on your smartphone or on your
computer (using Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for
Windows), and then synchronize to automatically update the info in
both places, so there’s no need to enter the info twice. We strongly
recommend that you synchronize your smartphone with your computer
frequently to keep your information up-to-date (and backed up) in both
locations.
computer, you also
need the sync cable
that came with your
smartphone.
Before you can synchronize, you need to install the desktop
synchronization software and connect the sync cable to your computer.
System requirements
Your computer should meet the following minimum system profiles for
Windows or Mac computers:
•
Windows 2000 or XP (or later)
•
•
•
•
32MB of available memory (RAM)
170MB of free hard disk space
CD drive
Available USB port
•
Mac OS X version 10.2 or later
•
•
•
•
128MB of total memory (RAM)
190MB of free hard disk space
CD drive
Available USB port
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
15
Setting up your computer
Upgrading from another Palm OS® device
Tip
If you have trouble
upgrading, including
finding the location of
quarantined files, see
[ * ] NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm OS device, skip ahead
to Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer.
You can transfer all compatible applications and information from your
previous Palm OS device to your new Treo™ 700P smartphone. This
includes your calendar events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as well as
your application settings and any compatible third-party applications
and files.
Upgrading.
Tip
Some third-party
utilities allow you to
back up your old
device’s information
onto an expansion
card and then transfer
the info to your Treo
700P smartphone. We
do not recommend
this method because
any incompatible
applications are also
transferred to your
smartphone.
When you install the desktop software from the Palm Software
Installation CD, some third-party applications may be quarantined
because they are not compatible with the Palm OS® software version
5.4.9 on your new Treo smartphone. Quarantined files are not installed
on your smartphone, nor are they deleted; these files are placed in a
new folder on your computer: C:\Program Files\Palm\device
name\PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps. (On some systems Palm may be
replaced with palmOne.)
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
16
Setting up your computer
0
1. Calculate how much space your apps and
info occupy on your previous Palm OS
device:
•
From the Applications View, open the
menus.
•
•
•
Select Info on the App menu.
At the bottom of the screen, select Size.
Look at the numbers on the Free Space
line and subtract the number on the left from the number on
the right to calculate the space used. For example, on the
device shown here, 22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that 4.9MB of
space is occupied on this device.
2. If the space occupied on your previous device is 60MB or less,
then go to step 3. If the space occupied is greater than 60MB, then
do any of the following to reduce the storage space you’re using
before you go to the next step:
•
•
Delete any third-party applications that you no longer use.
Move large files, such as eBooks and images, to an expansion
card.
•
•
Move third-party applications to an expansion card.
Purge old info in applications such as Calendar (Date Book),
Tasks (To Do), and email. Refer to the documentation that
came with your previous device for instructions on these
items.
3. Synchronize your previous device with your previous desktop
software to back up your information one last time.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
17
Setting up your computer
4. Install the desktop synchronization software from your new Palm
Software Installation CD (see Installing the desktop
synchronization software).
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Do not synchronize your new Treo 700P
smartphone with any previous versions of Palm Desktop software.
5. During the installation process, sync your new Treo smartphone
with your new desktop software as instructed. When prompted, do
the following:
•
•
•
Connect your new smartphone to your computer (see
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer).
Indicate whether you want to sync all applications or only PIM
applications.
Select a device name for your new smartphone; be sure to
select the same name that you used for your old device. (This
is the name that appears in the User list in Palm Desktop
software.)
6.
(Mac users only) If you have pictures on your previous device, copy
them from your previous device to an expansion card or beam
them to your new Treo 700P smartphone.
7. If you plan to continue using your previous device, perform a hard
reset to remove its associated device name. (See the
documentation that came with your previous device for
instructions on performing a hard reset.) Each device you
synchronize with your computer must have a unique name. The
next time you synchronize your previous device with your
computer, be sure to assign it a new name.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
18
Setting up your computer
If any third-party applications are quarantined during the installation,
do not manually install them. Contact the third-party developer for
software updates and info about compatibility with your Treo 700P
smartphone.
Installing the desktop synchronization software
[
!
]
Before You Begin
If you are installing on
a computer at work,
make sure your
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Even if you already own a Palm OS device and have
installed a previous version of the desktop software, you must install
the software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with
your Treo 700P smartphone.
computer is
configured to let you
install new software.
Contact your
0
company’s
IT department for help.
1. Close any applications that are currently running on your
computer, including those that are minimized. Your computer
needs to have all its resources available to install the software.
Tip
If you want to sync info
withapplicationsother
than Palm Desktop or
Microsoft Outlook, you
need to purchase
additional third-party
sync software. This
sync software is
2. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your
computer.
sometimes called a
conduit.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
19
Setting up your computer
3. If you are installing on a Mac, double-click the CD icon on the
desktop, and then double-click the PalmSoftware.pkg icon.
4. When the installation wizard opens, follow the onscreen
instructions. Please note these important points about the
installation process:
•
When the language selection screen appears, click the same
language you selected on your smartphone.
•
You can choose which desktop software you want to use for
synchronization: Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook
(Windows only).
[ * ] NOTE If you use Microsoft Outlook as your desktop email
application, select Microsoft Outlook as your desktop
synchronization software. If you select Microsoft Outlook,
Palm Desktop software still installs on your computer. When you
enter information on your computer, be sure to enter your
information in Microsoft Outlook not in Palm Desktop software.
•
When the install process prompts you to connect your
smartphone to your computer, go to Connecting your Treo
smartphone to your computer.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
20
Setting up your computer
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer
Tip
0
For best performance,
plug your sync cable
directly into a USB
porton yourcomputer.
If your computer has
USB ports on both the
suggest using the back
port; the front port is
often a low-power
port. If you use a USB
hub, make sure the
hub has its own power
supply.
1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
2. Plug the USB sync cable into an available USB port or a powered
USB hub on your computer.
3. With the sync button facing up, connect the sync cable to the
bottom of your smartphone. Do not press the sync button until
you are instructed to do so.
4. Connect the charger cable to the connector on the sync cable.
Sync
Sync button
cable
You are now ready to synchronize, go to Synchronizing information—
the basics.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
21
Synchronizing information—the basics
Synchronizing information—the basics
[
!
]
Before You Begin
To sync your info, you
Synchronizing means that info that is entered or updated in one place
(your smartphone or your computer) is automatically updated in the
other, so there’s no need to enter the info twice. We strongly
recommend that you sync your smartphone with your computer or
corporate server frequently to keep your info up-to-date (and backed
up) in both locations.
must install
Palm Desktop software
from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came
with your Treo 700P
smartphone—even if you
sync with Outlook or
another third-party
application. See
The info from all the following applications is updated by default each
time you sync your smartphone with your desktop software:
Installing the desktop
synchronizationsoftware
for instructions.
Tip
For more sync options,
including which apps
sync, see Synchronizing
How each application syncs depends on your computer type and the
desktop software you are using, as follows:
0
information—advanced.
Computer type
Desktop type
What syncs and where
Tip
Windows
Microsoft
Outlook
•
Calendar, Contacts, Memos,
and Tasks sync with Outlook
If you have any problems
synchronizing, see
Synchronization for
troubleshooting
•
Pics&Videos syncs with
Palm Desktop
suggestions.
Windows
Palm Desktop All apps sync with Palm Desktop
Palm Desktop All apps sync with Palm Desktop
Tip
Mac
For info on locating your
pictures and videos on
your computer, see
Viewing pictures and
videos on your
0
computer
.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
22
Synchronizing information—the basics
0
1. Connect your Treo 700P smartphone to your computer, as
described in Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer.
[ * ] NOTE If you’re performing initial setup, you smartphone
should already be connected to your computer.
2. Press the sync button on the sync cable.
Sync button
3. A message indicates that synchronization is in progress.
4. Wait for a message that indicates that the process is complete
before you disconnect the sync cable.
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you now have the option to install
bonus software from the Palm Software Installation CD. If you choose to
install some of the bonus software, you need to sync again to install the
software on your smartphone. You can also install bonus software later,
see Installing bonus software from the CD.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
23
Moving around on your
smartphone
Moving around the screen
Tip
Some third-party
applications may not
work with the 5-way
navigator, and you
must use the stylus
instead.
To move around the Treo™ 700P smartphone screen, you can use the
5-way navigator for one-handed navigation, or you can tap items on the
screen with the stylus. With use, you will find your own favorite way to
scroll, highlight, and select menu items.
The 5-way includes the Right , Left , Up , Down , and
Center
buttons.
Did You Know?
In this guide, we use
arrow icons to indicate
directions on the 5-
way. These are
different from any
onscreen arrows that
you tap with your
stylus or select with
the 5-way to display
pick lists.
Center
Left
Up
Right
Down
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
24
Moving around the screen
Scrolling through screens
Tip
As on a computer, you scroll on the Treo smartphone to move from
field to field or page to page, or in some cases to highlight an item or
option in a list.
Once you’ve opened
an application (see
Openingapplications),
you can experiment
with using the 5-way
to highlight various
screen elements.
In list screens, use the 5-way to select and move between entries such
as notes, memos, contacts, or photos. In individual entry screens—such
as a single photo or email message—use the 5-way to move among the
items on the screen or to move to another entry.
The behavior of the 5-way for list screens and entry screens varies
according to application. Here are some general scrolling tips that apply
in most applications:
•
Press Right , Left , Up , or
Down to move to the next field,
button, or action in that direction.
•
•
In list screens, press and hold Up
Down to scroll one screen at a time.
or
Scroll arrows
When inside a text field, press Right
or Left to scroll to the next character
or word, press Up
scroll between lines, or press and hold
Up or Down to scroll one screen
at a time.
or Down to
Slider
You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an
onscreen scroll arrow, or drag the slider of
an onscreen scroll bar.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
25
Moving around the screen
Highlighting and selecting items
On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or a check box—is
Tip
When a border
highlighted by default. The highlight identifies which item is affected by
your next action. Use the 5-way to move the highlight from one item to
another before opening or selecting it.
appears at the top and
bottom of a list screen,
press Center on the 5-
way to highlight the
first item in the list.
The highlight can take one of two forms, depending on what is
highlighted:
•
Border glow: When an onscreen button (such
as OK or Cancel) or pick list is highlighted,
the item displays a glow around its border. If
an entire list screen is highlighted, the glow
appears at the top and bottom of the screen
only.
•
Colored background: When a phone number,
text, an email address, a web link, or an item
in a list is highlighted, the item is displayed
as white text against a colored background.
Examples of lists include the Contacts list,
the Messaging Inbox, and the Tasks list.
After highlighting an item, you can select or
activate it by pressing Center
, or by
tapping the item with the stylus.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
26
Moving around the screen
Highlighting text
You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen.
•
•
•
Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight.
To highlight a word, double-tap it.
To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.
Accessing command buttons
In most applications, command buttons such as New, OK, and Details
appear at the bottom of the screen. In many cases, you can jump
directly to these buttons instead of scrolling to them.
Key Term
»
Dialog box A set of
options and command
buttons that are
enclosed by a border
and that enable you to
carry out a specific
task.
•
•
•
From a list screen, such as the Contacts list or Memos list, press
Right to jump to the first button.
From a screen where you create or edit entries, such as Edit
Contacts, press Center
to jump to the first button.
From a dialog box, such as Edit Categories, press Up
to scroll to the buttons.
or Down
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
27
Moving around the screen
Selecting menu items
Many applications have menus to give you access to additional
features. These menus are usually hidden from view, but they appear
when you open the menus
smartphone, it’s a good idea to familiarize yourself with the additional
Tip
Most menu items have
menu shortcuts listed
in the menu. To use a
menu shortcut, press
Menu plus theshortcut
letter. You don’t have
to see the menu item
to use the menu
. To get the most out of your Treo
features available through the various application menus.
0
1. Open the menus
to display an application’s menus
shortcut. For example,
when you’re in
Calendar, you can
press Menu + N to
create a new event.
Menu shortcut
2. Press Right and Left to switch between menus.
3. Press Up
and Down to highlight a menu item.
4. Press Center
to select the menu item, or press Menu
to
close the menu and cancel your selection.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
28
Moving around the screen
Selecting options in a pick list
A range of options is often presented in a type of menu called a pick list,
which can be identified by a downward-pointing arrow. Pick lists are
different from the application menus previously described. The
application menus give you access to additional features and pick lists
let you select the contents for a particular field.
You can select items from a pick list with the 5-way or the stylus.
•
5-way: Use the 5-way to highlight the pick list, and then press Center
to display the items in the list.
•
•
•
Press Up
Press Center
and Down to highlight the item you want.
to select the highlighted item.
To exit the pick list without making a selection, press Left or
Right
.
•
Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick list.
•
•
Tap the item you want from the list.
To exit the pick list without making a selection, tap outside the
list.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
29
Using the keyboard
Using the keyboard
Tip
When using the
keyboard, mostpeople
find it easiest to hold
the Treo smartphone
with two hands and
use the tips of both
thumbs to press the
keys.
Backlight
Backspace
Return
Did You Know?
The Treo smartphone
includes a keyboard
backlight that turns on
and off when the
Option
Shift/Find
Menu
screen turns on or off.
The backlight also
dims when an active
call lasts longer than a
specified period of
time. See Optimizing
power settings to
Space
Alt
adjust the automatic
shut-off and dimming
intervals.
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters
•
To enter lowercase letters, press the desired keys.
•
To enter an uppercase letter, press Shift/Find
and then press a
letter key. You don’t need to press and hold Shift while entering a
letter. When Shift is active, an up arrow appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
•
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find
Shift/Find once. When Caps Lock is on, an underlined up arrow
appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.
twice. To turn it off, press
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
30
Using the keyboard
Entering numbers, punctuation, and symbols
Did You Know?
Some application
views automatically
default to Option Lock,
such as the Dial Pad
View in the Phone
application or the
Calculator. In this case,
you do not need to
press Option to enter
numbers.
Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear
above the letters on the keys. To enter these
characters, do one of the following:
Symbol
Letter
•
Press Option , and then press the key with
the desired character shown above the letter. You don’t need to
press and hold Option while pressing the second key. When Option
is active, the symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the
screen.
•
To turn Option Lock on, press Option
twice. To turn it off, press
Option
once. When Option Lock is on, the symbol appears in
the lower-right corner of the screen.
Entering other symbols and accented characters
Symbols and accented characters that do not appear on the keyboard
are sometimes called alternate characters because they are entered
Did You Know?
Alternate characters
are grouped by their
similarity to the base
key. For example, the
alternate characters
for the e key are é, è, ë,
using the Alt
key.
0
1. Enter the character that corresponds to the symbol or accented
character you want. See the table on the next page.
ê, and
.
2. Press Alt
.
Tip
To see a list of
3. Press Up , Down , Right , or Left to highlight the desired
character.
additional alternate
characters, position
the cursor at the
beginning of the line
or after a space, and
then press Alt.
4. Press Center
to insert the character.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
31
Using the keyboard
0
Symbols and accented characters
Enter... Then press Alt
to select...
Enter... Then press Alt
Enter... Then press Alt
to select...
ó ò ö ô œ õ
Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ
¶
to select...
a
á à ä â ã å æ
Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ
ß
o
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 . , ‘
“ @ + -
* / # (
or )
; _ • \ % =
¢ [ ] { } < > « » © ® ™
~ ^ ø |
÷
£ ¥
°
A
O
b or B
p or P
c
ç ¢ ©
Ç ¢ ©
é è ë ê
É È Ë Ê
í ì ï î
Í Ì Ï Î
£
r or R
®
!
¡
C
s
ß š
?
:
¿
e
S
ß Š
; :-) :-( ;-)
£ ¥ ¢
E
t or T
™
$
i
u
ú ù ü û
Ú Ù Ü Û
x ¤
I
U
l or L
n
x or X
ñ
y
ý ÿ
N
Ñ
Y
Ý Ÿ
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
32
Opening applications
Opening applications
When you open an application using either Applications View or an
application button, you automatically close the application you were
previously using.
Using the quick buttons
Tip
The front of the Treo 700P smartphone has three buttons that you can
use to open applications. The fourth button opens the Applications
View (see Using Applications View).
You can customize the
quick buttons yourself;
see Reassigning
buttons for details.
Tip
You can press any of
the quick buttons or
the Applications
button to wake up your
smartphone screen.
Applications
Messaging
Phone
Calendar
Did You Know?
Pressing Option +
Menu dims your
smartphone screen.
Each of the three application quick button opens two applications:
•
•
To access a button’s primary application, simply press the button.
To access a button’s secondary application, press Option
then press the quick button.
and
0
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
33
Opening applications
Button
Primary application
Phone
Secondary application
+
+
+
Web
Calendar
World Clock
Tasks
Messaging
Using Applications View
You can access all available applications through the Applications View.
0
1. Press Applications
.
2. Use the 5-way navigator to highlight the application you want
to use.
3. Press Center
to open the selected application.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
34
Opening applications
In Applications View, you can also do any of the following:
•
Press Applications
categories of applications. See Applications settings for more info
repeatedly to cycle through various
on categories.
•
Enter the first few letters of the application’s name to highlight it.
For example, if you enter “p,” it highlights Phone; if you then enter
“r,” it highlights Prefs. If you pause and then enter “r,” it highlights
the first application that starts with “r.”
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
35
Using your phone
The Phone application enables you to make and receive calls and store
favorites for contacting people and opening applications.
Turning your smartphone on and off
[ * ] NOTE Throughout this guide the term smartphone is used to
describe your device and it’s physical aspects. The term phone is used
to describe the feature of your smartphone that enables you to connect
to and transmit data and voice over the Verizon Wireless network.
You can turn on your smartphone screen and your phone
independently. For example, the smartphone screen can be off while
the phone is turned on, or the smartphone screen can be on while the
phone is off. You can also have both the smartphone screen and the
phone turned on or off at the same time.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
36
Turning your smartphone on and off
Waking up the screen
When your smartphone screen is off, you need to wake up the screen.
Tip
You can set how long
the screen stays on.
Press Applications,
select Preferences,
select Power, and then
adjust the Auto-off
after setting.
0
1. Press and release Power/End
Center
to wake up the screen.
Power/End
2. Press Center
to turn off Keyguard. For more info about
turning Keyguard on and off, see Locking your keyboard
(Keyguard).
3. Press and release Power/End
to turn off the screen.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
37
Turning your smartphone on and off
Turning your phone on and off
Tip
When your phone is on, it is connected to the Verizon Wireless network
(provided you are in a coverage area) so that you can make and receive
phone calls and use wireless services, such as email, messaging, and
the web browser. During initial setup, your phone is on by default, so
you can use wireless services right away.
The indicator light
flashes green when
your phone is on and
you’re inside a
coverage area. If
you’re outside a
coverage area, No
Service appears in the
upper-left corner and
the indicator light
flashes amber.
If you turn off your phone, you can still use the organizer features such
as Contacts and Calendar, as well as the media features, such as the
pTunes music application and Pics&Videos. This is sometimes referred
to as flight mode and is ideal for airplane flights and maximizing battery
life.
Tip
0
1. Wake up the screen.
If the Ringer switch is
in the Sound On
position, you hear a
series of tones when
you turn your phone
on and off (see
2. Press and hold Power/End
your smartphone locates a signal (provided you are in a coverage
area), Verizon Wireless and the signal-strength icon appear at
to turn on your phone. When
the top of the screen, indicating that you can use the phone and
Internet features (if supported by the mobile network).
Silencing sounds).
3. Press and hold Power/End
again to turn off your phone.
When your phone is off, Phone Off and the phone-off icon
appear at the top of the screen and your smartphone is not
connected to any mobile network. You can still use the
nonwireless features of your smartphone, such as Contacts,
Calendar, Tasks, and Memos.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
38
Making calls
Making calls
Tip
If you changed the
wallpaper in the Main
View of the Phone
application (see
Your Treo™ 700P smartphone offers several options for making calls. As
you become familiar with your smartphone, you’ll discover which
method you prefer.
Customizing the Main
View in the Phone
application), you can
still access the Dial
Pad. From the Main
View of the Phone
application, press
Send, and then select
Dial Pad.
Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Enter the phone number by tapping the onscreen Dial Pad with the
stylus.
Did You Know?
You can paste
numbers directly into
the Dial Pad. Copy a
number from another
application and press
Phone to switch to the
Dial Pad. Open the Edit
menu and select Paste.
Press Send to dial.
3. Tap Dial or press Send
to dial.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
40
Making calls
Dialing by contact name
Before you can dial a call by contact name, you must create some
contacts (see Adding a contact), or import them by synchronizing (see
Synchronizing information—the basics).
0
Did You Know?
If you want to be able
to dial by entering a
contact name in the
Main View of the
Phone application
(instead of a phone
number), you can
1. Press Phone
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.
change a setting to do
that (see Customizing
phone settings).
3. Using the keyboard, just start entering one of the following for the
contact you want to call:
•
•
•
First name (JOH for John)
Tip
Last name (SMI for Smith)
To see more info for a
contact, highlight the
nameandpressCenter
on the 5-way to view
the address, company,
and other details.
First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith)
For example, entering SM would display Smilla Anderson, John
Smith, and Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only John Smith.
Text appears
here as you enter
it
Tip
To restart your search,
press Backspace to
delete letters you’ve
entered. Or select
Cancel to return to the
Main View.
4. Select the number you want to dial.
5. Press Send
to dial.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
42
Making calls
Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button
Tip
Your smartphone comes with a few predefined speed-dial favorite
To view more favorite
buttons, repeatedly
press Down or Right
on the 5-way to scroll
to other Favorites
pages.
buttons, but you can also create your own favorites. See Creating a
speed-dial favorite button.
0
1. Press Phone
2. Press Down to access Favorites.
3. Use the 5-way to highlight the desired speed-dial favorite
button
.
Did You Know?
You can see all the
contact numbers for
the selected person or
business. Highlightthe
speed-dial favorite
button and press
Space on the
.
keyboard.
4. Press Center
button.
to dial the number associated with the selected
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
43
Making calls
Dialing from a web page or message
Your smartphone recognizes most phone numbers that appear on web
pages or in text, email, or multimedia messages.
Tip
If you can’t use the
5-way or stylus to
highlight and dial a
phone number on
a web page or in a
message, it meansthat
your smartphone
doesn’t recognize the
number as a phone
number.
0
1. Select the phone number on the web page or in the message.
2. Press Center
to open the Dial Number dialog box.
3. Select Dial to dial the number.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
44
Making calls
Redialing a recently called number
Did You Know?
If a number in your
Contacts list supports
text messaging, you
can send a text
message from your
Call Log. If a number in
your Call Log matches
a number in your
Contacts list, open the
Record menu and
select Message to
send a message to this
contact.
•
To dial the last number: From the Main View in the Phone
application, press and hold Send
called.
to dial the last number you
•
To select from your most recently dialed numbers: From the Main View
in the Phone application, press Send
to open the Redial list,
select the number you want to call, and then press Send
again to dial.
•
To select from a chronological list of calls: Select the Call Log favorite
button. You can also access the Call Log from the Main View in the
Phone application by pressing Send
from the Redial list.
and selecting Call Log
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
45
Receiving calls
Receiving calls
Tip
See a photo of the
person calling you!
Learn how to assign a
caller ID photo in
Assigning a caller ID
photo.
To receive calls, your phone must be on. This is
different from having only the screen turned
on (see Turning your phone on and off). When
your phone is off, your calls go to voicemail.
To answer a call, do one of the following:
Did You Know?
When you silence the
ringer while it is
ringing, you can either
answer the call or let it
ring through to
•
•
Press Send
.
Using the 5-way navigator or the stylus,
select the onscreen Answer button.
•
Press the headset button (if the headset is attached).
voicemail.
To ignore a call, do one of the following:
Did You Know?
If music is playing and
a call arrives, the
phone rings softly. The
music pauses
automatically if you
answer the call and
resumes when you
hang up.
•
Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/End
to select Ignore.
or use the 5-way
•
Send the caller a text message: Use the 5-way to select Ignore with
Text. This option sends the call to voicemail and opens a text
message addressed to the caller.
To silence the phone while it is ringing, do one of the following:
•
Press any key on your smartphone except Send, Power/End, or the
5-way.
Tip
The headset button
may work differently
on headsets other than
the one provided with
your smartphone.
•
Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound Off
immediately silences all system sounds, including the ringer.
position. This
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
46
Using voicemail
Using voicemail
Your Verizon Wireless service includes voicemail. Keep in mind that
airtime and other charges apply when using voicemail from your
phone.
Setting up voicemail
Tip
0
If you can’t connect to
the Verizon Wireless
voicemail system,
contact Verizon
Wireless for
1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see Turning your phone on
and off).
2. Press Phone
.
3. Press and hold 1 or select the Voicemail favorite button to dial the
Verizon Wireless automated voicemail system.
assistance:
•
Verizon Wireless
technical support:
866-788-9387.
•
Verizon Wireless
customer service and
billing: 800-256-4646.
4. Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
47
Using voicemail
Voicemail notification
When you have a new voicemail message, you are notified with an
Alert screen. To respond to the Alert screen, select OK to dismiss the
alert or select Listen to play the message. When you have messages
that you have not listened to, a Voicemail icon
also appears in the
title bar at the top of the screen.
Retrieving voicemail messages
Tip
0
If a Voicemail icon
appears in the title bar,
you can select this icon
to retrieve your
voicemail.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail system or select the
Voicemail favorite button.
3. Enter your voicemail password using the keyboard, or select Extra
Digits if you defined this option (see Editing a favorite button for
details). Remember, you do not need to press Option to enter
numbers, *, or # while on an active call.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
48
Managing active calls
Managing active calls
Did You Know?
To avoid accidentally
pressing onscreen
buttons while you’re
holding the
When you make or receive a call, the Active Call View appears. Use the
5-way navigator to access the onscreen buttons in this view.
smartphone up to your
ear to speak, you can
disable the screen’s
touch-sensitivefeature
during active calls (see
Locking your screen).
Call duration
Caller’s name
and number
Tip
If the screen dims
during a call, press any
key except Power/End
to restore the screen
brightness. Be careful
not to press Power/
End to restore the
screen brightness
because this will
accidentally end the
call.
The onscreen buttons in the Active Call View perform the following
functions:
0
Ends the call immediately. You can also press the headset
button (if the headset is attached).
Turns on the speakerphone. When the speakerphone is on,
you can take the smartphone away from your ear and use
other features during a call. For example, you can check
your calendar or look up contact info.
Did You Know?
You can set how long
the screen stays at full
brightness during
phone calls. See
Turns off the speakerphone when it is on.
Optimizing power
settings for details.
Replaces the Spkr-phone button when a Bluetooth headset
is attached. Select this button to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth headset to the built-in earpiece.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
49
Managing active calls
Places the current call on hold.
Enables you to place another call while the first call is on
hold. For information on handling a second incoming call,
see Making a second call.
Opens the Dial Pad so you can manually dial additional
numbers, such as an extension or a response to a voice
prompt.
Dials any extra digits (such as a password or an extension)
that you assigned to a favorite button. This button replaces
the Dial Pad button during outgoing calls to numbers that
include predefined extra digits. See Defining favorite
buttons for information on defining extra digits.
Mutes the microphone so that you cannot be heard.
Ending a call
Do one of the following:
•
•
•
Press Power/End
.
Select Hang Up All.
Press the button on the headset (if the headset is attached).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
50
Managing active calls
Switching applications during an active call
Tip
You can use many other applications on your smartphone while holding
a phone conversation, including the organizer and text messaging
features. You cannot, however, make a data connection while on an
active call. This means that you cannot browse the web or send and
receive email or multimedia messages while on an active call.
0
You can also press
Phone to toggle
between the Active
Call View and the Main
View in the Phone app,
so you can access a
favorite during a call.
1. Go to Applications
.
Tip
2. Select the icon for the application you want to open.
3. Complete the task in the application.
If you’d like to continue
talking while viewing
another application,
select Spkr-phone
before you switch to
theotherapplication. If
you’reusingaheadset,
you can skip this step.
4. Press Phone
to return to the Active Call View.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
51
Managing active calls
Saving phone numbers
Tip
After you complete an outgoing call to a number that is not in your
Contacts list, you are prompted to add the number to your Contacts list.
You are also prompted to add new numbers from incoming calls with
caller ID.
You can turn the Add
New Number prompt
on and off. From the
Main View in the
Phone app, open the
Options Menu, and
select Phone
Preferences. To turn
this option on, check
the Ask to add
•
To create a new contact entry for this
number, select Create a New Contact, and
enter the contact’s info.
•
To add this number to an existing contact
entry, select Add to a Contact, and then
select the contact. The number will be
pasted into the first available phone number
field for that contact.
unknown phone
numbers after calls
box. To turn this option
off, uncheck this box.
•
•
To decline adding this number, select Cancel.
To disable the Add New Number prompt, check the Don’t ask me
this again box.
If you don’t add a number right away, follow these steps to add it later.
0
1. In the Call Log (see Redialing a recently called number), highlight
the number you want to save.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Add Contact.
4. Enter the information for the entry.
5. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
52
Managing active calls
Making a second call
Did You Know?
When the second call
is an outgoing call, you
can conference the
two calls, but you
cannot swap between
them.
You can make a second call while your first call is still active.
0
1. Dial the first number and wait until the person answers.
When the second call
is an incoming call,
you can swap between
the two calls, but you
cannot conference
them.
When two calls are
active and you press
Power/End, you hang
up both calls. If the
second call is an
outgoing call, you can
return to the first call
by waiting for the
person on the second
call to hang up. If you
accidentally hang up
both calls, your
2. Use the 5-way navigator to select Hold.
3. Use the 5-way to select Add Call.
4. Dial the second number using any of the methods described in
Making calls.
5. When the Dial another call prompt appears, select Yes.
When two calls are active, the Active Call View includes two status
lines, each representing one of the calls.
smartphone
automatically dials the
number that was on
hold.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
53
Managing active calls
Answering a second call (call waiting)
Tip
When you are on an active call, you can receive a second call. When the
second call comes in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call Waiting
dialog box appears. You can do any of the following to handle the
second call:
To switch between the
original call and the
second call you
answered, use the
5-way to select Swap.
•
To place the current call on hold and answer the new call, press
Send or use the 5-way navigator to select Answer.
•
•
To send the new call to voicemail, use the 5-way to select Ignore.
To send the new call to voicemail and send the caller a text
message, use the 5-way to select Ignore with Text.
•
To hang up the current call and answer the new call, press Power/
End
.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
54
Managing active calls
Making a conference call
When you are on a call and place a second outgoing call, you can join
two calls in a conference session, provided that the service is available
in your area. Please contact Verizon Wireless for more information.
Additional charges may apply and minutes in your mobile account may
be deducted for each active call you place.
0
1. While the first call is active, place a second call.
2. Use the 5-way to select Conf. This joins the two active calls in a
conference session.
3. To end the conference, press Power/End
to end all the calls.
Using Flash mode during an Active call
Flash mode enables you to manually manage your calls while one or
more calls are active. This mode is often used during a conference call
when one of the calls has ended but the other remains connected.
0
Did You Know?
Pressing Send during
a conference call
usually hangs up the
second call. However,
depending on your
network connection,
you may occasionally
hang up the first call.
1. Press Send
from the Active Call View.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
55
Managing active calls
2. If the Do you want to switch to Flash mode prompt appears,
select Yes.
3. While in Flash mode, do any of the following:
•
If you have one active call and answer an incoming second
call, press Send to swap between the calls.
•
If you have one active call, to make an outgoing second call,
dial the number using any of the methods described in Making
calls.
•
•
If you have one active call and place an outgoing second call,
press Send
after establishing a connection with the
second party to set up a conference session using three-way
calling.
If you have two calls in conference, press Send
to hang
up one of the calls; you can then dial another number and
place the new caller into the conference session.
4. To exit Flash mode and end all the calls, press Power/End
.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
56
Managing active calls
Forwarding calls
You can forward calls to another phone number. Please check with
Verizon Wireless about availability and pricing of forwarded calls; call
forwarding is not available in all areas, and additional charges may
apply.
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Enter *72 followed by the number where you want to forward your
calls. For example, to forward calls to 415-555-1234, enter:
*724155551234.
3. Press Send
4. When you’re ready to turn off call forwarding, enter *720 and then
press Send
to turn on call forwarding.
.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
57
Viewing minutes usage
Viewing minutes usage
Tip
0
Want to see how much
time you spent on a
particular call? From
the Call Log, select the
call, and then select
Details. Keep in mind
that your billing
1. Select the Call Log favorite button.
2. Select Totals.
statement may vary
slightly from the
information you see
onscreen. Usage is
charged based on your
calling plan, and
calling plans vary.
3. OPTIONAL To reset the counters to zero, select Reset Counters.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
58
Defining favorite buttons
Defining favorite buttons
Tip
To see the next
Your Treo smartphone provides 70 favorite buttons for quick access to
the following common tasks:
Favorites page, press
Right on the 5-way. To
see the previous page,
press Left on the
5-way. To see more
pages, press Left or
Right on the 5-way
again.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dialing a phone number (speed dial)
Accessing your Call Log
Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad
Opening an application
Accessing a web page
Did You Know?
If you’re upgrading
from a previous Treo
smartphone, your
favorites may be
Addressing a text, MMS, or email message
Accessing voicemail (preset on your Treo
smartphone)
transferred along with
your other info.
Verizon Wireless may preset favorite buttons on your smartphone that
are customized for their services. You can customize the remaining
favorite buttons to perform any of the supported tasks.
However, you may
need to rearrange the
order in which your
favorites appear by
opening the Record
menu and then
selecting Edit
Favorites Pages.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
59
Defining favorite buttons
Creating a speed-dial favorite button
Tip
0
If there are no blank
buttons on the current
Favorites page, press
Right on the 5-way to
scroll through the
other pages. If all your
favorites are full, you
can delete a favorite to
make room for a new
one (see Deleting a
favorite button).
1. Press Phone
.
2. Use the 5-way navigator to select a blank favorite button.
3. Enter a label for the favorite:
•
If the entry is for an existing contact, select Lookup. Start
entering the last name of the contact, and select the contact
when it appears in the lookup list.
•
If the entry is for a new contact, enter the label, press Down
and enter the number.
,
Did You Know?
You can assign a
special ringtone for a
contact. See Assigning
a caller ID ringtone for
details.
4. OPTIONAL Enter a Quick Key, which you can press and hold from
the Phone application to instantly dial this speed-dial number.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
60
Defining favorite buttons
5. OPTIONAL Select More, and then select advanced options:
•
Extra Digits: Defines additional digits to dial, such as a
password or extension. To enter a one-second pause, insert a
comma between digits. To add a longer pause, enter more
commas.
•
Dial Extra Digits Automatically: Dials predefined extra digits
immediately after dialing the phone number, when checked.
6. Select OK.
Creating other types of favorite buttons
Tip
0
You can also organize
your buttons on
various Favorites
pages. Open the
Record menu and
select Edit Favorites
Pages.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Use the 5-way to access Favorites.
3. Select a blank button.
4. Select the Types pick list and select Call Log, Dial Pad, Application,
Message, Email, or Web Link.
5. Enter a label for the favorite and enter any other necessary
information on the screen.
Did You Know?
When creating a
Message or Email
favorite, you can enter
multiple addresses;
simply separate each
address with a
6. OPTIONAL Enter a Quick Key, which you can press and hold to
open the favorite from the Phone application.
7. Select OK.
comma. This is an
easy way to send
messages to a group
of people.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
61
Defining favorite buttons
Editing a favorite button
Tip
0
To arrange your
1. Press Phone
.
favorites, open the
menus, select Edit
Favorites Pages on the
record menu, and drag
and drop the buttons
in a new slot. To move
a favorite to another
page, drag the button
onto the page icon at
the bottom of the
screen.
2. Use the 5-way to access Favorites.
3. Highlight the favorite button you want to edit.
4. Open the menus
.
5. Select Edit Favorites Button on the Record menu.
6. Make the desired changes. For example, you can add a Quick Key,
which you can press and hold to instantly open the favorite from
the Phone application.
7. Select OK.
Deleting a favorite button
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Use the 5-way to access Favorites.
3. Highlight the favorite button you want to delete.
4. Open the menus
.
5. Select Edit Favorites Button on the Record menu.
6. Select Delete.
7. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
62
Using a phone headset
Using a phone headset
Tip
To find compatible
hands-free devices, go
You can connect a phone headset for hands-free operation. If you need
to use your phone while driving and this is permitted in your area, we
recommend using a phone headset (wired headset included) or a
hands-free car kit (sold separately).
Tip
In addition to the headset included with your Treo smartphone, your
smartphone is compatible with the following types of headsets that are
sold separately:
To listen to music in
stereo, you can
purchase the Palm
2-in-1 Stereo Headset.
3.5mm connector,
then you need to
purchase a stereo
adapter. Visit
more info on audio
•
•
Wired headsets with a 2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin)
Wireless headsets and car kits enabled with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2
wireless technology
Check the specifications for your headset or car kit to confirm
compatibility. When in doubt, ask the manufacturer if the product is
compatible with Treo 700P smartphones. Please note that you cannot
use a headset with Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to music
files.
Tip
The headset designed
for Treo 180/270/300
devices is not
compatible with your
Treo 700P smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
63
Using a phone headset
Using a wired headset
Tip
If you hear a headset
buzz or experience
poor microphone
performance, your
headset may be
incompatible with
your smartphone.
Microphone
Headset
button
Tip
The headset button
may work differently
on other headsets.
Speaker
When using the headset that is included with your smartphone, you can
press the headset button to perform any of the following tasks:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Answer an incoming call
Answer a call-waiting call
Pick up a call that is on hold
Switch between two incoming calls
Join two calls in a conference (if the second call is outgoing)
Hang up all active calls
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
64
Using a phone headset
Connecting to a Bluetooth headset or car kit
Tip
Once you set up a partnership with a Bluetooth headset or car kit, you
can communicate with that device whenever it is turned on and within
range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental
conditions. Performance and range may be reduced by physical
obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and
other factors.
For a list of compatible
Bluetooth hands-free
devices, go to
www.palm.com/us/
treo700p_bluetooth_
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
in the title bar.
or tap the
Tip
Bluetooth icon
You can also tap the
Bluetooth icon in the
title bar of to open the
Bluetooth application.
2. Select On.
Key Term
»
Partnership Two
devices—for example,
your smartphone and
a hands-free device—
that can connect
because each device
finds the same
passkey on the other
device. Once you form
a partnership with a
device, you don’t need
to enter a passkey to
connect with that
device again.
3. Enter a device name for your smartphone. This is the name that
appears on the other Bluetooth device’s screen when it connects to
your smartphone.
4. Prepare your headset or car kit to accept a connection from
another Bluetooth device. See the documentation that came with
your hands-free device for instructions.
Partnership is also
know as paired
relationship, pairing,
trusted device, and
trusted pair.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
65
Using a phone headset
5. Select Setup Devices.
6. Select Hands-free Setup.
7. Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership with the
specific hands-free device. When prompted, enter a passkey.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices may have a built-in
passkey; other devices may provide a screen where you enter the
passkey. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both
your smartphone and your hands-free device. We recommend that
you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to improve the
security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more
difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. If the hands-free
device has a built-in passkey, see the device’s documentation for
the passkey.
8. After you finish setting up the device, select Done to return to the
Applications View.
You can now use your smartphone with the Bluetooth headset or car kit.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
66
Using a phone headset
Using a Bluetooth headset or car kit
Tip
If your Bluetooth headset or car kit is turned on and within range (up to
30 feet), the Treo smartphone automatically routes all calls to the
headset or car kit instead of to the smartphone’s earpiece. When a call
comes in, your smartphone rings and the headset or car kit beeps. Even
if you answer the call on your Treo smartphone, the call goes to the
headset or car kit.
If you’re using a
Bluetooth headset or
car kit and you want to
return to the earpiece
or a wired headset
during a call, select
Cancel Bluetooth on
the Active Call View.
You can then return
the call to the headset
by selecting Connect
Bluetooth from the
Options menu.
The features available on your headset or car kit vary by model. Check
the documentation for your hands-free device for details on the
supported features and how to use those features. Your smartphone
can support the following features, provided that your headset or car kit
also supports them:
•
•
•
•
•
Answer an incoming call
Answer a call-waiting call
Switch between two incoming calls
Hang up a single call
Did You Know?
If you have both a
Bluetooth headset and
a car kit, the last one
you connected
becomes the active
device. To switch
between the headset
and car kit, turn off the
active device before
you try to connect to
the other device.
Transfer an outgoing call from the smartphone’s earpiece to the
headset or car kit
•
•
Ignore an incoming call
Redial the last number you called from the hands-free device
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
67
Using a phone headset
Setting your hands-free device to automatically
answer calls
You can set your hands-free device to automatically answer calls,
provided the device supports this feature.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Hands-free.
and select Prefs
.
3. Select the Auto answer pick list and select whether you want your
hands-free device to automatically answer incoming calls, and
how quickly it answers.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
68
Customizing phone settings
Customizing phone settings
Selecting ringtones
Tip
You can set various tones for various types of incoming calls.
You can also record
sounds and use them as
ringtones. Select Manage
on the Sound & Alerts
Preferences screen.
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.
4. Select the Application pick list and select Ring Tones.
•
To record a sound,
select New.
To play a sound, select
it with the 5-way.
To delete a sound,
•
•
highlight it and press
Backspace.
•
To send a sound,
highlight it and select
Send.
Did You Know?
You can download any
compatible ringtone
directly to your
5. Select the Volume pick list and select the volume level.
smartphone (see
6. Select the Vibrate pick list and select how you want your
smartphone to vibrate upon an incoming call.
Downloading files from a
web page). You can also
download ringtones to
your computer and then
email them to your
smartphone.
7. OPTIONAL Check the Escalate ring tone volume box if you want
the ring to play softly and then increase to full volume the longer it
rings.
Did You Know?
You can assign a
ringtone to a favorite, a
contact, or an entire
category of contacts.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
69
Customizing phone settings
8. Select ringtones from the following pick lists:
•
•
•
Known Caller: An incoming call from someone in your Contacts
or Favorites.
Unknown Caller: An incoming call from someone identified by
caller ID who is not in your Contacts or Favorites.
Roaming: A special tone for incoming calls when you’re
outside your home mobile network. This tone overrides all
other ringtones, unless it is set to No Sound.
9. Select Done.
Selecting Phone alert tones
You can set various tones for various types of alerts.
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.
4. Select the Application pick list and select Phone Alerts.
5. Select the Volume pick list and select the volume level.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
70
Customizing phone settings
6. Select the Vibrate pick list and select how you want your
smartphone to vibrate upon an incoming call.
7. Select alert tones from the following pick lists:
•
•
•
Voicemail Alert: Indicates that a new voicemail message has
arrived.
Coverage in/out: Indicates that you moved into or out of a
coverage area.
Signal faded: Indicates that the signal lost strength and a call
was dropped.
8. Select Done.
Adjusting call volume
While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your
smartphone to adjust the call volume.
Volume button
Side button
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
71
Customizing phone settings
Adjusting ringer volume
When a call is not in progress and music is not playing, press the
Volume button on the side of your Treo smartphone to adjust ringer
volume, and then press the Side button to confirm your selection.
Assigning a caller ID photo
Did You Know?
If you assign pictures
to your contacts in
Microsoft Outlook or
Palm Desktopsoftware
and you install the
desktop software from
the Palm Software
Installation CD, the
pictures are
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.
3. Open the contact to whom you want to give a caller ID photo.
4. Select Edit.
automaticallyaddedto
your contact entries on
your smartphone
when you sync. If you
use third-party
synchronization
software, picture sync
may not be supported.
Check with the
software developer for
information.
5. Select the Picture box and do one of the following:
•
Select Camera to take a photo and add it to this contact entry
when you save the photo (if your smartphone includes a
camera).
•
Select Photos and select an existing photo that you want to
assign to this contact.
6. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
72
Customizing phone settings
Assigning a caller ID ringtone
Tip
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is calling before you even look
at your smartphone. This is a great way to identify calls from important
people in your life and to screen calls you’d prefer not answer.
0
You can assign a
ringtone to an entire
category of contacts.
For example, use a
special ringtone for
categories such as
Family, Work, or Golf
Buddies. Select the
category pick list in the
upper-right corner,
select Edit Categories,
and then select the
category. Select the
ringtone on the Edit
Category screen.
1. Press Phone
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.
3. Open the contact to whom you want to give a caller ID ringtone.
4. Select Edit.
5. Select the Ringtone pick list and select a tone for this contact entry.
6. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
73
Customizing phone settings
Customizing the Main View in the Phone application
Phone Display Options let you customize the appearance and entry
Tip
If you select the Show
Wallpaper option, you
can still access the Dial
Pad. From the Phone
application’s Main
View, press Send to
open the Redial list,
and then select Dial
Pad.
mode of the Main View in the Phone application.
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Display Options.
4. Set any of the following options:
•
Show… : Sets whether the Dial Pad or
wallpaper appears in the Main View
of the Phone application. If you
select Show Wallpaper, select the
thumbnail image and then select an
image to use as wallpaper.
Did You Know?
You can also set the
background for the
Calendar Agenda
View. See Customizing
display options for
your calendar for
details.
•
•
Typing… : Sets whether typing enters
numbers in the Dial Pad or starts a
contact search.
Tip
If you select the Typing
starts contacts search
option, you can still
enter numbers in the
Dial Pad by pressing
and holding Option
while entering
Show Calendar event: Sets whether the current event from the
Calendar application appears in the Main View of the Phone
application. When this option is enabled, you can then select
this event to jump to the Calendar application.
•
•
Show Favorite buttons: Sets whether Favorites appear in the
Main View of the Phone application.
numbers.
Rows: Sets the number of favorite button rows that appear in
the Main View of the Phone application.
5. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
74
Customizing phone settings
Setting your dialing preferences
Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix to your phone numbers. For
example, you can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit phone
numbers. You can add a different prefix based on the length of the
phone number.
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Dial Preferences.
4. Set any of the following options:
•
Dialing from North America: Formats phone numbers using
North American conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).
•
Always dial 1 in front of the area code: Adds a 1 in front of 10-
digit phone numbers. This option is available only when North
American Dialing is enabled.
•
•
International Prefix: Adds the specified number in front of
International phone numbers.
To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to 7-digit numbers. For
example, enter your own area code to automatically add your
area code when you dial local numbers.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
75
Customizing phone settings
•
To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a prefix to numbers with the
specified number of digits. For example, if all the phone
numbers in your office begin with 555, followed by a 4-digit
extension, you can select 4, enter your area code, and then
enter 555 as the prefix. When you want to call a colleague,
simply enter the colleague’s 4-digit extension. Your
smartphone automatically dials the area code and 555 plus the
4-digit extension. You can also create contact entries with just
the extension number and then dial the number from your
Contacts list.
5. Select OK.
Choosing your privacy settings
Tip
To maintain privacy, you can encrypt conversations when you place or
receive calls, provided that this feature is supported by the network.
You can also choose whether your longitude and latitude position are
available to the network and third-party applications at all times or only
during an emergency call.
Select Location ON if
you want to allow the
network to determine
your longitude and
latitude position at any
time in order to
0
provide location-
specific services. To
restrict your location
information to
emergency services
only, select 911 Only.
1. Press Phone
2. Open the menus
3. From the Options menu, select Phone Preferences.
.
.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
76
Customizing phone settings
4. Check the Enable Voice Privacy box (voice conversations will be
encrypted).
5. Choose Location ON or 911 Only.
6. Select OK.
When Voice Privacy is enabled, a Voice Privacy icon appears in the
Active Call View. The Voice Privacy icon does not appear when a call
is not in progress or if Voice Privacy service is not available in your
area.
When Location ON is selected, the Location icon
appears on the
Applications View with radiating bars. When 911 Only is selected, the
radiating bars disappear from the Location icon.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
77
Customizing phone settings
Enabling TTY
TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications
device that enables you to communicate by telephone if you are deaf,
hard of hearing, or have speech or language disabilities.
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. You can connect a
TTY/TDD machine to your device through the headset jack while this
mode is enabled. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY
device for connectivity information and to ensure that the TTY device
supports digital wireless transmission.
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. From the Options menu, select Phone Preferences.
4. Select the TTY Mode pick list and select one of the following
modes:
•
•
•
•
TTY Full: Sends and receives text.
TTY + Talk: Sends voice and receives text.
TTY + Hear: Sends text and receives voice.
Off: Sends and receives voice.
5. Select OK. A red TTY icon appears in the title bar of the Phone
application whenever TTY is enabled.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
78
Customizing phone settings
Manually selecting the wireless band
You can use Select Band to search for service in a different frequency.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT You should only change this setting if a Verizon
Wireless customer service representative recommends that you do so.
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Choose Select Band from the Options menu.
4. Select the new band, if available.
5. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
79
What are all those icons?
What are all those icons?
Key Term
1xRTT (Single carrier [1x]
radio transmission
technology): A wireless
technology that can
provide fast data transfer
and Internet access with
average speeds of 60–
80Kbps and bursts up to
144Kbps.
»
You can monitor the status of several items using icons in the title bar
of the Phone application:
0
Your phone is on and you are in a Verizon Wireless coverage
area. If you are outside a coverage area, No Service,
Extended Network, or Roaming appears instead. No Service
means that there is no coverage at all and Roaming means
that another wireless service provider’s network is available.
When you turn off your phone, Phone Off appears.
Key Term
»
EVDO (Evolution Data
Optimized): A wireless
broadband technology
that is designed for very
high-speed data transfer
with average download
speeds of 400–700Kbps,
capable of reaching
You are outside a Verizon Wireless coverage area and are
roaming on another wireless service provider’s network.
This icon appears in addition to the word Roaming, and the
icon may flash if the provider is not on the Verizon Wireless
preferred roaming list.
Your phone is on. The bars display the signal strength. The
stronger the signal, the more bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars appear.
speeds up to1.8Mbps,
and upload speeds up to
156Kbps
Your phone is off.
Did You Know?
YoucantaptheBluetooth
icon to quickly turn
You are in an area that supports NationalAccess (1xRTT)
data services.
Bluetooth wireless
features on and off.
You are in an area that supports BroadbandAccess (EVDO)
data services.
Your phone is on and connected to a NationalAccess
network, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can
still make and receive calls.
Tip
To display the remaining
battery power, tap the
battery icon at the top of
the screen.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
80
What are all those icons?
Your phone is on and connected to a BroadbandAccess
network, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can
still make and receive calls.
Your phone is on and a NationalAccess data connection is
active. You can still make calls, but you cannot receive calls
(incoming calls go to voicemail). When you make a call the
data transmission is automatically interrupted.
Your phone is on and a BroadbandAccess data connection is
active. You can still make or receive calls. When you make or
receive a call, the data transmission is automatically
interrupted, and then it resumes when you end the call.
You have new voicemail messages. You can select this icon
to retrieve your messages.
You have a new alert, such as a Calendar alarm or a new text
message. To view the alert, press and hold Center
or
select the icon. See Viewing and using the Alert screen.
TTY/TDD Mode is active. This mode you to communicate by
telephone if you are deaf, hard of hearing, or have speech or
language disabilities.
Voice Privacy is enabled, you are in a service area that
supports this feature, and a call is in progress. When this
feature is active, voice calls are encrypted for added privacy.
The Location setting is on and your longitude and latitude
position are available to the network and third-party
applications. When you select “911 Only,” the radiating bars
disappear from this icon and your location is available only
during emergency calls.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
81
What are all those icons?
®
The Bluetooth wireless technology icon appears in gray
when this feature is off, in blue when this feature is on, and
in reverse blue when your smartphone is communicating
with another Bluetooth device.
This icon replaces the Bluetooth icon when your
smartphone is connected to a Bluetooth headset or car kit.
This icon appears in dark blue when a call is in progress and
in light blue when a call is not in progress.
Your battery is partially drained. When the battery drains to
20% of its capacity, the icon changes from blue to red. At
10% of its capacity, you begin to receive warning messages,
and at 5% of its capacity, the smartphone beeps (if the
Ringer switch is in the Sound On position) and the icon
changes from red to clear.
Your battery is charging. The lightning bolt turns from red to
green when the battery is fully charged and your
smartphone remains connected to the charger.
Your battery is fully charged and your smartphone is not
connected to the charger.
You have new text or multimedia messages. The numbers
next to the icon indicate the number of unread messages in
your Inbox. You can select this icon to retrieve your
messages.
You have new email messages. The numbers next to the
icon indicate the number of unread messages in your Inbox.
If you set up multiple email accounts on your smartphone,
this number reflects the account that was most recently
accessed. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
82
What are all those icons?
Viewing and using the Alert screen
The Alert screen on your smartphone shows info about incoming items
such as new email messages and Calendar events. The Alert screen also
notifies you if you miss a phone call.
To view the Alert screen, tap the blinking bell
upper-left corner of any screen, or press and hold Center
when it appears in the
when the
blinking bell appears.
You can do any of the following:
•
•
Check the box to clear an alert from the list.
Select the alert to open the corresponding application and view the
alert item (message, event, missed call, and so on).
•
Select Done to close the Alert screen and return to whatever you
were doing on your smartphone before you opened the Alert
screen. The bell continues to blink in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
•
Select Clear All to delete all alerts on the Alert screen.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
83
Using email
Your Treo™ 700P smartphone includes two email applications: the
Wireless Sync application and the VersaMail® application. You can also
access web-based email from your smartphone’s web browser.
[
!
]
Before You Begin
You must activate data
services on your
Verizon Wireless
account before you
can use email on your
smartphone.
Which application should I use?
0
I want to…
Use this app…
Check free web mail, such as Hotmail, Gmail, or
Yahoo!
Web browser
Tip
An email application is
not an email provider.
It works with an
account from a
provider to transfer
messages to
Check fee-based Internet mail, such as Yahoo! Mail
Plus
Wireless Sync
or VersaMail
Sync my email and organizer info with my company’s Wireless Sync
Exchange server
or VersaMail
your smartphone.
Sync my email with my company’s Domino server
Wireless Sync
or VersaMail
Key Term
»
Email provider The
service you use to
send and receive
email. Your email
provider’s name
appears between the
@ symbol and the dot
symbol in your email
address.
Check messages from multiple email addresses
VersaMail
Sync my email and organizer info with my company’s Wireless Sync
Lotus Notes/Domino server
Connect to my company’s Wireless Sync server
Wireless Sync
Access email on my smartphone, my computer, and Wireless Sync
the Verizon Wireless web site
Use the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) while Wireless Sync
sending and receiving messages
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
84
The Wireless Sync application
The Wireless Sync application
In addition to sending and receiving email messages, you can also use
Wireless Sync to sync your email and other personal information when
you’re away from your computer.
The sections that follow cover how to enter your email account settings
in the Wireless Sync application. To use the Wireless Sync application,
you must subscribe to the Wireless Sync feature from Verizon Wireless
(additional charges may apply). For more info on Wireless Sync and to
learn how to send and receive mail, see the documentation at the
following location: http://www.wirelesssync.vzw.com
How do I get started?
0
1. If you are setting up a personal email account, or if your corporate
email account does not use a Microsoft Exchange Server or a
Domino server, gather the following info, and then follow the
steps in Setting up Wireless Sync to work with Internet email.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wireless Sync password (if you have one)
Mobile phone number
Email address and password
Incoming mail server name
Incoming mail server port number
Mail protocol: POP or IMAP
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
85
The Wireless Sync application
2. If your corporate email account uses a Microsoft Exchange Server
or a Domino server, gather the following info, and then follow the
steps in Setting up Wireless Sync to work with corporate email.
•
•
•
Wireless Sync password (if you have one)
Mobile phone number
Email address and password
3. If your corporate email account uses a Wireless Sync server which
connects to a Microsoft Exchange Server or a Domino server,
gather the following info, and then follow the steps in Setting up
Wireless Sync to work with a corporate Wireless Sync server.
•
•
The URL for the Wireless Sync server
Your corporate login and password
Setting up Wireless Sync to work with Internet email
Did You Know?
Depending on your
service agreement and
rate plan, data fees
may apply when
downloading the
Wireless Sync
In the Wireless Sync application, all personal email accounts, such as
Earthlink, AOL, or Yahoo! Mail Plus, are considered Internet email
accounts. In addition, any corporate email account that does not use a
Microsoft Exchange or Domino server is referred to as an Internet email
account.
0
software.
1. Go to Applications
and select Wireless Sync
.
2. Select Start to download the Wireless Sync software to your
smartphone.
3. Leave the Wireless Sync server box empty, and then select Next.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
86
The Wireless Sync application
4. Select Yes, No, or Forgot, to indicate whether you have a Wireless
Sync password. If you select No, your smartphone’s web browser
opens and you are taken through a series of steps to create an
account. If you select Forgot, Verizon Wireless sends a temporary
password to your smartphone.
5. Set the following Account Setup info, and then select Next:
•
Mobile number: Enter your smartphone’s phone number, if it is
not already filled in.
•
•
Password: Enter the password for your Wireless Sync account.
Read Terms & Conditions: Select this button to read about your
Wireless Sync account.
•
I agree to the terms & conditions: Check the box to indicate that
you agree to the terms and conditions. You cannot continue
unless you check this box.
6. Set the following Account Setup info, and then select Next:
•
Confirm home time zone: Select the pick list and select the time
zone where you live.
•
Enable weather info for my ZIP code: Enter the ZIP code where
you live, so that you can receive local weather reports.
7. Set the following Email Setup info, and then select Next:
•
•
•
Set up Internet email: Select this setting to set up Wireless Sync
to work with your existing Internet email account.
Email Address: Enter the email address you want Wireless Sync
to access.
Password: Enter the password you use to access this email
address.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
87
The Wireless Sync application
8. If Wireless Sync recognizes your mail settings, the first sync
begins and you are done with the setup process.
If Wireless Sync does not recognize your mail settings, enter the
following information, and then select Next:
•
•
•
Server name: Enter the name of your incoming mail server,
such as mail.myisp.com.
Port: Enter the port number for your incoming mail server, such
as 110 (POP) or 143 (IMAP).
POP: If you are connecting to a POP server, check the POP box.
If you are connecting to an IMAP server, leave this box empty.
If you are not sure which type of server you’re connecting to,
contact your email provider.
•
Leave messages on server: Check this box if you want to leave a
copy of your messages on the mail server after you download
them to your smartphone. If you want to delete the messages
from your mail server after downloading them to your
smartphone, leave this box empty.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
88
The Wireless Sync application
Setting up Wireless Sync to work with corporate email
Tip
If your company uses a Microsoft Exchange Server or a Domino server,
follow these steps to set up your email account settings in the Wireless
Sync application. If your company uses a different type of mail server,
see Setting up Wireless Sync to work with Internet email for
instructions.
The Wireless Sync and
VersaMail applications
require the correct
protocol, server, and
security settings to
send and receive
email. Your email
provider can easily
provide these settings.
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Wireless Sync
.
2. Select Start to download the Wireless Sync software to your
smartphone.
3. Leave the box asking if your company has a Wireless Sync server
empty, and then select Next.
4. Select Yes, No, or Forgot, to indicate whether you have a Wireless
Sync password. If you select No, your smartphone’s web browser
opens and you are taken through a series of steps to create an
account. If you select Forgot, Verizon Wireless sends a temporary
password to your smartphone.
5. Set the following Account Setup info, and then select Next:
•
Mobile number: Enter your smartphone’s phone number, if it is
not already filled in.
•
•
Password: Enter the password for your Wireless Sync account.
Read Terms & Conditions: Select this button to read about your
Wireless Sync account.
•
I agree to the terms & conditions: Check the box to indicate that
you agree to the terms and conditions. You cannot continue
unless you check this box.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
89
The Wireless Sync application
6. Set the following Account Setup info, and then select Next:
•
Confirm home time zone: Select the pick list and select the time
zone where you live.
•
Enable weather info for my ZIP code: Enter the ZIP code where
you live, so that you can receive local weather reports.
7. Set the following Email Setup info, and then select Next:
•
Set up Exchange or Domino email: Select this setting to set up
Wireless Sync to work with your corporate email account.
•
Email Address: Enter the email address you want Wireless Sync
to access.
8. When the Congratulations message appears, select Done.
install the software that lets Wireless Sync work with your server.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
90
The Wireless Sync application
Setting up Wireless Sync to work with a corporate
Wireless Sync server
If your company uses a Wireless Sync server to connect to your
Microsoft Exchange Server or a Domino server, follow these steps to set
up your email account settings in the Wireless Sync application.
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Wireless Sync
.
2. Select Start to download the Wireless Sync software to your
smartphone.
3. Check the box asking if your company has a Wireless Sync server,
and then select Next.
4. Enter the URL for your company’s Wireless Sync server, and then
select Next.
5. Select Yes or No to indicate whether you have a Wireless Sync
password. If you select No, your smartphone’s web browser opens
and you are taken through a series of steps to create an account.
6. Set the following Account Setup info, and then select Next:
•
Mobile number: Enter your corporate login in this field. This
may be your username or may include your corporate domain
information. Contact your Wireless Sync administrator for
more information.
•
•
Password: Enter the corporate password.
Read Terms & Conditions: Select this button to read about your
Wireless Sync account.
•
I agree to the terms & conditions: Check the box to indicate that
you agree to the terms and conditions. You cannot continue
unless you check this box.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
91
The Wireless Sync application
7. Set the following Account Setup info, and then select Next:
•
Confirm home time zone: Select the pick list and select the time
zone where you live.
•
Enable weather info for my ZIP code: Enter the ZIP code where
you live, so that you can receive local weather reports.
8. When the Congratulations message appears, select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
92
The Wireless Sync application
The VersaMail application
Before you can use VersaMail, you need to enter your email account
settings. If you have multiple email accounts, you must enter settings
for each email account.
After you enter your email account settings, see the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application on the Palm Software Installation CD for
information on sending and receiving messages and customizing your
VersaMail application settings.
How do I get started?
Tip
0
The correct protocol,
server, and security
settings are required
for VersaMail to be
able to send and
receive email for your
account. Your email
provider can easily
provide these settings.
You may be able to
find this account setup
info on your email
provider’s website.
1. Install the VersaMail application from the CD that came with your
smartphone. See Installing applications for details.
2. If you already use the VersaMail application on a Palm OS® device,
and you want to transfer those settings to your new smartphone,
then see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm
Software Installation CD for upgrade information.
3. If you’re entering settings for an email account on a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync® server, a Lotus Notes server, or a Microsoft
MAPI server, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on
the Palm Software Installation CD for setup steps.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
93
The Wireless Sync application
4. If your email provider is listed in the following table, then skip to
Setting up VersaMail to work with common providers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AOL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Comcast
CompuServe
Covad
EarthLink
Gmail
•
•
•
•
•
•
RCN
Apple.Mac
AT&T Global
AT&T Worldnet
Bell South
Cablevision
Charter
SBC/PacBell
SBC/Prodigy
Speakeasy
Verizon DSL
Yahoo!
Mail.com
NetZero
5. If your email provider’s name is not listed, then you need to obtain
the following info from your system administrator or ISP, and then
skip to Setting up VersaMail to work with other providers:
•
•
Mail protocol: POP or IMAP
Incoming and outgoing mail server names, such as
mail.myisp.com
•
•
Incoming and outgoing mail server port numbers, such as
110 (incoming POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25 (outgoing POP
or IMAP)
(If necessary) Security settings: APOP, ESMTP, SSL
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
94
The Wireless Sync application
Setting up VersaMail to work with common providers
Tip
0
To enter settings for
anotheremailaccount,
open the Accounts
menu and select
Account Setup.
1. Go to Applications
and select Email
.
2. If prompted to select an initial setup option, then select Continue.
3. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive name, such as Work
Email.
4. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select your email
provider, such as Earthlink, and then select Next.
5. Enter the username for your email account. Your username
appears before the @ symbol in your email address.
6. Select the Password box, enter your email account password,
select OK, and then select Next.
7. Select Next, and then select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
95
The Wireless Sync application
Setting up VersaMail to work with other providers
Tip
0
To set more options for
incoming and
outgoing messages,
select Advanced on
the Account setup
complete screen.
1. Go to Applications
and select Email
.
2. If prompted to select an initial setup option, then select Continue.
3. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive name, such as Work
Email.
4. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select Other.
5. Select the Protocol pick list, select POP or IMAP (based on the info
you got from your system administrator or ISP), and then select
Next.
6. Enter the username for your email account. Your username
appears before the @ symbol in your email address.
7. Select the Password box, enter your email account password,
select OK, and then select Next.
8. Enter your email address and the names of the incoming and
outgoing mail servers, and then select Next.
9. If your system administrator or ISP provided port numbers or
security settings, select Advanced, and then enter those settings.
10. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
96
Using other wireless
features
Messaging
[
!
]
Before You Begin
Make sure your phone
is turned on (see
Turning your phone on
and off).
You can use the Messaging application to exchange brief text messages
(SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS) with other devices and email
addresses that support these forms of messaging. Before you use your
smartphone to send or receive messages, refer to your service plan for
pricing and availability of messaging services.
Did You Know?
You can page
someone to call you by
sending them a blank
text message.
Did You Know?
You can address
messages to multiple
recipients by
separating the
addresses with a
comma. If you address
a single message to
three people, you will
be billed for three
messages.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
97
Messaging
Creating and sending a text message
Tip
Each text message can hold up to 160 characters. Messages with more
than 160 characters are automatically split into several messages. (If
you send a text message to an email address, the email address is
deducted from the 160-character count.)
If you see numbers
when you expect to
see letters (or the other
way around), you need
to turn Option Lock on
by pressing Option
0
1. Press Messaging
2. Select New.
.
twice or turn it off by
pressing Option once.
3. Select the To field to address the message:
Tip
•
Press Center
recent addresses, select it from the list.
. If the recipient’s name appears in the list of
To add a new
QuickText phrase,
select Edit QuickText
from the list.
•
If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and
last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone
number or email address, depending on where you want to
send the message.
Tip
Some symbols can’t
be used in text
messages. The
Messaging application
automatically replaces
invalid characters.
•
If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list of recent addresses or
your Contacts list, enter the phone number, email address, or a
Verizon Wireless alias.
Tip
Select Save as Draft to
save a draft of the
message without
sending it. To access
the draft, select the
category pick list at the
top of the screen and
select Drafts.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
98
Messaging
Creating and sending a multimedia message
Key Term
»
Multimedia messages consist of text, photos, videos, and sounds
Slide A collection of
text, pictures, videos,
and sounds that are
grouped together
within a multimedia
message. During
playback, all the items
within a particular
slide appear on the
same screen. If a
multimedia message
contains multiple
slides, each slide can
be viewed separately
during playback.
presented as one or more slides. You can include any of the following
items:
0
Item
Supported File Types
JPEG, GIF, BMP
MPEG4, 3GP2
MIDI
Pictures
Videos
Ringtones
Sound clips
WAV, QCELP
Key Term
Pix Place The
»
companion website
for Verizon Wireless
picture and video
messaging services.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
100
Messaging
0
1. Press Messaging
.
Did You Know?
You can send a contact
or calendar entry.
Select the entry, open
the Record menu,
2. Select New.
3. Select Add Media.
4. Select the To field to address the message with up to 25 addresses:
select Send, and then
select Messaging.
•
•
Press Center
recent addresses, select it from the list.
. If the recipient’s name appears in the list of
Tip
If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and
last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone
number or email address.
When creating a
message, you can
preview or delete an
item. Highlight the
item, press Center on
the 5-way, and then
select Remove, View,
or Play.
•
•
If the recipient’s name is not in the list of recent addresses or
your Contacts list, enter the phone number, email address, or
alias.
If you want to upload a picture or video to your Verizon
Wireless PIX Place account, press Center
PixPlace.
Tip
, and then select
You can set the priority
of outgoing messages
to High or Normal.
5. Enter a subject.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
101
Messaging
6. OPTIONAL Select the image
placeholder, and then select one of the
following:
•
•
•
Attach image: Insert one or more
photos or videos from your
smartphone or an expansion card.
Take new picture: Take a picture with
the built-in camera and add it to the
message.
Take new video: Capture a video of up to 14 seconds with the
built-in camcorder and add it to the message.
7. OPTIONAL Select Sound , and then select one of the following:
•
•
Record new: Record a sound clip of up to 1 minute.
Attach voice memo: Select a memo you recorded in the Voice
Memo application.
•
Attach ringtone: Select a ringtone.
8. Enter a text message or caption.
9. Select Add slide to insert additional slides.
10. OPTIONAL Select Preview to view the message as the recipient
will see it.
11. Select Send.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
102
Messaging
Receiving messages
Tip
When your phone is turned on and is in an area
of wireless coverage, you automatically receive
new text messages. For multimedia messages,
you can set your smartphone to automatically
download new messages or to notify you that a
message is ready to be downloaded (see
Customizing your Messaging settings). You can
also configure how your smartphone notifies
you when a new message arrives (see Selecting
Messaging alert tones).
If you have multiple
alerts, the Alert screen
displays all your
pending alerts. Select
an item’s description
to jump to that item, or
check the box to clear
that item. To view all
your pending alerts
from any screen on
your smartphone,
press and hold Center
on the 5-way.
The new message alert may include any of the following buttons:
•
•
OK: Dismisses the alert and places the message in your Inbox.
Did You Know?
You can send and
Reply: Opens the Chat View, where you can reply with a text
message. To send an MMS reply, select Add Media from the Chat
View.
receive text messages
even while you are on
a phone call. This is
easiest when using a
hands-free headset or
the speakerphone.
•
•
•
Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone number.
Go To Msg: Opens the message so you can view its full contents.
Delete: Moves the message from your Inbox to the Deleted folder.
Tip
When you receive a
message, you can also
press Send to call the
sender.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
103
Messaging
Using links in messages
When you receive a text message that contains a telephone number,
email address, or URL, you can dial the number, send an email
message, or go to the web page immediately.
0
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select the message that contains the link you want to use.
3. Select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as
underlined blue text).
Your smartphone automatically launches the appropriate application
from the link.
Viewing/playing a multimedia message
0
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select the message you want to view.
3. If there are sounds or multiple slides, playback begins
immediately.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
104
Messaging
4. Do any of the following:
•
•
•
Use the onscreen controls to scroll to
other slides and messages.
To play a sound, select the Sound
icon
.
To save a sound, open the menus
, and select Save Sound from
the Message menu.
•
•
•
To save a picture, open the menus
, and select Save Picture from the Message menu. You can
access saved pictures later by going to Applications
selecting Pics&Videos
and
.
To save a calendar or contact entry, select it. You can access
saved entries later by going to Applications and selecting
(depending on the type of entry
Calendar
or Contacts
you saved).
To select the text, position the cursor in the text area, and then
press Center
.
•
•
To stop playback of a message, select Play/Stop.
To view message details, open the menus
Message Details from the Message menu.
and select
5. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
105
Messaging
Arranging your messages
You can rearrange the messages in any folder by using the
Sort command.
0
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select the folder list in the title bar and select the folder you want
to sort.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select View, and then select Sort by Name or Sort by Date.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
106
Messaging
Deleting messages
You can delete several messages at once from any folder by using the
Purge command.
0
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Select the folder list in the title bar and select the folder that
contains the messages you want to delete.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Purge from the Message menu.
5. Select the Purge pick list, and then select an option.
6. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
107
Messaging
Chatting with Messaging
Tip
When you exchange more than one message with a single contact, the
messages you exchange with that person are grouped into a chat
session. When you select a chat session from your message list, the
upper part of the Chat view displays all messages you’ve exchanged
with this contact, and the lower part provides an entry area.
To find a chat you had
with someone, open
your Messaging Inbox
and select a chat
session.
Tip
You can carry on multiple chats at the same time and easily switch
Pale gray text indicates
that a message is
pending or enroute.
between them, using the pick list at the top of the screen.
0
1. Press Messaging
.
2. Do one of the following:
•
•
Start a new chat: Select a message and reply to it.
Continue an existing chat: Select a message with the chat icon
.
3. Enter your message.
4. Select Send.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
108
Messaging
Customizing your Messaging settings
0
1. Press Messaging
2. Open the menus
.
.
3. From the Options menu, select Preferences.
4. On the Messages tab, set any of the
following preferences for your individual
messages:
•
Create new messages as: Indicate
whether you want to default to text or
multimedia messages when you
create a new message.
•
Request Receipts (MMS only): Indicate
whether you want to receive a
confirmation when an outgoing MMS message is delivered.
•
•
Confirm message deletions: Indicate whether you want deletion
confirmation prompts to appear.
Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicate whether you want the body
text to appear in the alert when you receive a new message, or
if you want the alert to hide the text and prompt you to go to
the message.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
109
Messaging
5. Select the Chat tab and set any of the
following preferences for chat sessions.
•
Create chats from messages: Indicate
when you want to group messages
from the same person into a chat.
•
Show timestamps in chats: Indicate
whether you want to see the local date
and time the message was sent next to
each message.
•
•
•
Display my name in chat window as: Enter the name you want to
use as the label for your messages in the Chat view.
Label color: Select a color to differentiate your messages from
the sender’s messages while in the Chat view.
Use color for: Indicate whether you want both your name and
message text in the selected label color, or only your name.
6. Select the Network tab and set any of the
following preferences for network
connections.
•
Automatically collect MMS messages:
Indicate whether you want to
download multimedia messages
automatically.
•
Even when roaming: Indicate whether
you want to automatically receive
multimedia messages while roaming.
7. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
110
Messaging
Selecting Messaging alert tones
Did You Know?
Your smartphone
includes a silent alert
that can vibrate even
when the Ringer
switch is set to Sound
Off.
0
1. Press Messaging
2. Open the menus
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Alerts.
4. Select the Application pick list and select Messaging.
5. Select the Volume pick list and select the volume level.
6. Select the Vibrate pick list and select how you want your
smartphone to vibrate upon an incoming call.
7. Select the Message Tone pick list and select a tone for incoming
message alerts.
8. Check the boxes if you want to see onscreen alerts when a new
message arrives and when a message you sent is received.
9. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
111
Messaging
What are all those icons?
The message descriptions in the Inbox, Outbox, and Sent folders show
the message status:
Tip
By default, the
Messaging app shows
the Inbox folder. To
view a different folder,
select the folder list in
the title bar and select
a different folder from
the list.
•
•
•
Unread messages appear in bold.
Read messages appear in plain text.
Urgent messages appear with a red exclamation point (!).
The following icons show the message type and additional status info:
0
Did You Know?
If you are outside a
coverage area or if
your phone is turned
off, outgoing
messages go into the
Outbox. When you
return to a coverage
area or turn your
A text message
A chat session
A multimedia message that is ready for you to download
A multimedia message that is fully downloaded
phone back on, your
pending messages are
sent automatically and
transferred to the Sent
folder.
A multimedia message that is fully downloaded and contains
sound
A voicemail page
An incoming message with an error
A message that is waiting to be sent
A message that was successfully sent
A message that was sent to multiple recipients, and only
some of the recipients received the message
An outgoing message with an error
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
112
Web browser
Web browser
Tip
To adjust the font size,
open the Options
menu and select Font.
To fit more text on the
screen, select Small.
To make the text easier
to read, select Large.
The web browser on your Treo™ 700P smartphone provides quick and
easy access to web pages. You can view most sites you use on your
computer, including those with security and advanced features, such as
JavaScript and frames. To browse the web, you must activate data
services from Verizon Wireless.
Did You Know?
You can send email
from a web page on
your smartphone.
Email addresses
appear as links on web
pages. After you
configure an email
application on your
smartphone, you can
select an email
address link to create a
message to the
selected address.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
113
Web browser
Viewing a web page
Tip
The web browser uses patent-pending technology to optimize web
pages for your smartphone. By default, the browser is in Optimized
Mode, which reformats web pages into a single column and resizes
images on your screen. This way, you can see most content without
scrolling left or right.
To find a recent page
or search, select the
Address Bar pick list
and select the item
from the list.
Tip
Want to get to the
icons faster? Press
Space to jump to the
Address Bar and then
press Up on the 5-way
to scroll to the icons.
You can also open the
menus to access the
same commands from
the menus.
0
1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see Turning your phone on
Tip
and off).
You can customize the
Fast Mode settings.
See Customizing your
web browser settings
for details.
2. Press Phone
should see either the NationalAccess
icon in the title bar.
and confirm that data services are available. You
or BroadbandAccess
If you do not see a NationalAccess or BroadbandAccess icon, data
services are not available in your current location and you cannot
connect to the Internet.
Tip
Tap and hold the back
or forward buttons or
select these buttons
with the 5-way to pop
up a list of sites you’ve
visited.
3. Go to Applications
and select Web
.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
114
Web browser
4. Enter a web page address (URL) in the Address Bar and select Go.
[ * ] NOTE If you browse to a secure web page, a lock icon
appears in the Address Bar.
5. Do any of the following to navigate within the web page:
•
View a page in wide layout format (as on your computer): Open
the menus
, select Options, and then select Wide Page
Mode.
•
Scroll through the page: In Optimized Mode (the default format
which is optimized for your smartphone screen), press Up
or Down . In Wide Page Mode, press Up , Down , Left
or Right to scroll in all directions.
,
•
•
Follow a link to another web page: In Optimized Mode, highlight
the link by pressing Left or Right and then press
Center
to go to the selected page. In Wide Page mode,
use the stylus to select a link.
Submit a form: Enter the info and then select the onscreen
button to submit the form. If the form doesn’t have an
onscreen button, press Return
.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
115
Web browser
Goes to your home page.
Opens a dialog box where you can enter a web address you
want to go to or view a list of recently viewed web pages.
Goes to the previous web page.
Goes to the next web page.
Refreshes the page with the latest content from the Internet.
Opens a list where you can select Fast Mode (no images or
style sheets) or Normal Mode (with images and style
sheets).
Creating a bookmark
Did You Know?
The predefined
bookmarks take you to
pages that are
optimized for your
smartphone.
With bookmarks you can instantly access a web page without entering
the address every time. The web browser can store up to 100
bookmarks or saved pages, allowing you to open your favorite web
pages quickly. Note that a bookmark is different from a favorite (see
Defining favorite buttons).
0
1. Go to the page you want to bookmark.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Add Bookmark from the Page menu.
4. OPTIONAL Change the entries in the Name and Description
fields.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
116
Web browser
5. Select OK, and then select OK again.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
117
Web browser
Saving a page
You can use the web browser to save a page for offline viewing, so you
don’t need a wireless connection to view it later.
0
1. Go to the page you want to save.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Save Page from the Page menu.
4. Select OK, and then select OK again.
Viewing bookmarks or saved pages
Did You Know?
You can make
Bookmarks View the
default view when you
open the browser.
Open the Options
menu and select
Preferences. Select the
Start With pick list and
select Bookmarks.
Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in Bookmarks View. Saved
pages are indicated by a small triangle in the upper-right corner of the
bookmark.
0
1. Select the Bookmarks View icon
.
2. Select the bookmark or saved page you want to view.
Tip
To go back to the last
web page you viewed
without selecting a
bookmark, select Page
View.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
118
Web browser
Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved page
Tip
0
If you can’t edit, delete,
or beam a bookmark, it
is probably locked and
these actions are
1. From the Bookmarks View, open the menus
2. Select Edit Bookmarks on the Bookmarks menu.
3. Select the bookmark you want to edit or delete.
4. Enter the desired changes.
.
prohibited.
5. Select OK.
Arranging bookmarks and saved pages
The Bookmarks View includes ten pages of bookmarks so that you can
arrange bookmarks and saved pages in a logical fashion. For example,
you can store travel links on one bookmark page, stock links on another,
and business links on a third page.
0
1. From the Bookmarks View, open the menus
.
2. Select Edit Bookmarks from the Bookmarks menu.
3. Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
119
Web browser
Downloading files from a web page
Tip
The web browser lets you download files that are recognized by one of
the applications on your smartphone. When you download a file, you
can open it in the application that recognizes the file. For example, if
you download a video, you can view it later in the Pics&Videos
application. If a file is not recognized by any of the applications on your
smartphone, you can download the file to an expansion card, but you
cannot open it on your smartphone.
You can also access
software and other
downloads using the
Downloads bookmark.
Did You Know?
You can visit secure
websites. The security
certificates and 128-bit
Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) encryption let you
browse secure sites,
such as online shopping,
banking, and email.
Remember: Some
secure sites also require
specific browsers and
may not work with the
web browser
You can download files such as new applications, and choose to play or
save music and video files in many popular formats—provided that the
website permits the downloading of files:
0
Item
Supported File Types
JPEG, WBMP, GIF, animated GIF
MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV
MIDI, AAC
Pictures
Videos
Ringtones
Music
0
application.
MP3, WMA
Did You Know?
The web browser
supportsJavaScript, SSL
strong encryption, and
cookies, but does not
support plug-ins (such as
Flash or Shockwave) or
Java applets.
1. Go to the page with the link to the file you want to download.
2. Press Left or Right to highlight the link to the file, and then
press Center
.
3. If prompted, select what you want to do with the file: Play, Save To
Device, or Save To Card.
Tip
4. Select Yes.
You can also save an
image from a web page
by tapping and holding it
with the stylus.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
121
Web browser
Streaming files from a web page
Tip
The web browser lets you stream files that are recognized by one of the
applications on your smartphone. For example, you can choose to play
music and video files in many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).
If the web browser
recognizes streamed
content that is not
supported by any of
the applications on
your smartphone, a
“Media type not
0
1. When the web browser recognizes streamed content on a web
page, it displays a Play icon
streamed content, select Play
. To view or listen to the
.
supported” message
appears.
2. Once streaming begins, playback starts automatically. Use the
following controls when viewing or listening:
•
Select
content.
to return to the web page containing the streamed
•
•
Select
or press Center
or press Center
to pause playback.
Select
pausing.
to resume playback after
•
A few seconds after playback begins, the toolbar is hidden and
you can view the content on the full screen. Press Up
Down to display the toolbar; press Up or Down
to hide the toolbar again.
or
again
•
Press the Volume button on the side of your smartphone to
adjust the volume.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
122
Web browser
Copying text from a web page
Did You Know?
If the web browser
does not recognize a
phone number as
You can copy text from a web page and paste it into other applications.
0
1. Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy.
dialable, you can copy
the phone number (as
text) and paste it into
the Dial Pad (see
Dialing from a web
page or message).
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Edit, and then select Copy.
4. Go to the app in which you want to paste the text and use the
stylus or 5-way to position the cursor where you want to paste the
text.
5. Open the menus
.
6. Select Edit, and then select Paste.
Returning to recently viewed pages
The History list stores the addresses of the last 100 pages you visited.
Items in the History list are sorted chronologically.
0
1. From the Page View, open the menus
2. Select History from the Page menu.
.
3. Press Down to navigate through the list.
4. Select the web page you want to load.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
123
Web browser
Finding text on a web page
0
1. From the Page View, open the menus
.
2. Select Find Text on Page from the Page menu.
3. Enter the text you want to find.
4. Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box to indicate whether you
want the search to wrap from the end of the page to the beginning
when the end is reached.
5. Select Find to start the search.
Customizing your web browser settings
Key Term
Cascading Style
»
0
1. From the Page View, open the menus
.
Sheets A method
used to describe the
presentation of a web
page or document
written in a markup
language, such as
HTML or XML.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Select Page and set any of the following preferences:
•
•
•
•
Start With: Determines which view
appears when you open the browser.
Home Page: Sets the page that appears
when you select
.
Tip
Lots of pretty graphics
slowing you down?
Browse the web faster
by enabling the Don’t
download images!
option.
Restore Default: Selects the original
home page, if you changed it.
Show Address Bar: Sets whether the web
address appears in Page View. When it is
visible, you can select the pick list to go to a previously viewed
page or enter a URL directly from Page View.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
124
Web browser
4. Select General and set any of the following
preferences:
•
Auto-complete: Determines whether the
web browser suggests text, based on
your previous entries, when you begin
entering info.
•
Disable cookies: Determines whether
websites can store personalized info on
your Treo smartphone. Some sites do
not work properly if you select this option.
•
•
•
Disable JavaScript: Bypasses JavaScript elements on the web
pages you view.
Tap and Drag: Determines whether dragging the stylus selects
text or scrolls through the content of the page.
Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines whether you want to hide
selected items so that web pages load faster. When you select
Fast mode, you can set the following options:
•
Disable cascading style sheets: Determines whether style
sheets are applied when you load a web page. When style
sheets are disabled, pages download faster, but you may
lose some of the formatting.
•
Don’t download images!: Determines whether images
appear when you load a web page. If you select not to view
images, you can still see any image by selecting the
placeholder box on the web page.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
125
Web browser
5. Select Advanced and set any of the following preferences:
•
Set memory limit for storing pages: Sets
the amount of memory used for your
cache. Pages are cached so that they
load faster the next time you view
them.
•
•
Cookies: Indicates how much memory
is being used by cookies. To free up
this memory, select Clear Cookies.
Cache: Indicates how much memory is being used by your
cache to store recent pages and history. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cache.
•
•
Clear cache on exit: Determines whether the cache clears each
time you exit the web browser.
Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to access the Internet. If your
connection requires a proxy server, please contact your
Internet service provider or IT administrator for this
information.
6. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
126
BroadbandAccess Connect
BroadbandAccess Connect
Tip
Certain smartphone
application features,
The BroadbandAccess Connect service lets you convert your
smartphone into a wireless modem so that you can access the Internet
from your computer. You can set up BroadbandAccess Connect using
the USB sync cable between your smartphone and your Windows
computer. If you have a Mac computer enabled with Bluetooth®
wireless technology, you can set up a wireless connection to use
BroadbandAccess Connect using your smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth
technology.
such as synchronizing
or automatic retrieval
of email messages, do
not work when you
have a
BroadbandAccess
Connect connection
between your
smartphone and your
computer. Tousethese
features, terminate the
BroadbandAccess
Connect connection.
The VZAccess Manager software helps you set up and manage your
BroadbandAccess Connect connections.
Installing the VZAccess Manager software
To use the BroadbandAccess Connect service, you must install the
VZAccess Manager software on your computer.
Tip
You may need to use a
virtual private network
(VPN) to access
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD in your computer’s CD
drive and select the Install bonus software option.
corporate email. Check
with your system
administrator for more
information.
2. Under Desktop Applications, select VZAccess Manager.
3. Click the link to download the software and follow the instructions
to begin installation.
4. On the Welcome screen, click Next.
5. Select the option to accept the License Agreement, and then click
Next.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
127
BroadbandAccess Connect
6. Select whether you want to use with VZAccess Manager with one
smartphone only or with all smartphones you use on this
computer, and then select whether or not to create a desktop
shortcut. Click Next.
7. Select the folder where you want to store the VZAccess Manager
application files, or select Next to accept the default location.
8. Select whether to do a Typical or a Custom installation (we
recommend Typical), and then click Next to begin the installation
process.
9. On the Installation Complete screen, click Finish.
MAC ONLY
0
1. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD in your computer’s CD
drive and select the Install bonus software option.
2. Under Desktop Applications, select VZAccess Manager.
3. Click the link to download the software and follow the instructions
to begin installation.
4. On the Welcome screen, click Next.
5. Select the option to accept the License Agreement, and then click
Next.
6. Select the device name for each device you want to use with
VZAccess Manager, and then select whether or not to create a
desktop shortcut. Click Next.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
128
BroadbandAccess Connect
Getting help with VZAccess Manager software
You can learn how to use VZAccess Manager software from within the
application itself.
0
1. If you chose to install a desktop shortcut, click the VZAccess
Manager icon on your desktop. Otherwise, use the Start menu on
your Windows computer to navigate to and select the VZAccess
Manager software.
2. Click Help at the top of the screen and select a topic to learn more.
Accessing the Internet using a BroadbandAccess
Connect connection
0
1. Connect your smartphone to your computer with the sync cable
(see Connecting your Treo smartphone to your computer).
2. Click the VZAccess Manager icon on your computer desktop.
3. Click the connection you want to use, such as BroadbandAccess.
4. Click Connect.
You can now use the BroadbandAccess Connect service to access the
Internet from your computer.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
129
BroadbandAccess Connect
Terminating a BroadbandAccess Connect Internet
session
Did You Know?
When the
0
BroadbandAccess
Connect service is on,
you cannot use any of
the wireless features
that require a data
connection, such as
web browsing and
sending and receiving
email and MMS
1. On your computer, go to the VZAccess Manager window.
2. Click Disconnect.
messages. You can
still use all the
nonwireless features
of your smartphone. If
you choose to make a
call, you automatically
interrupt the
BroadbandAccess
Connect connection.
When you receive a
call in a
BroadbandAccess
coverage area, the call
interrupts the
BroadbandAccess
Connectconnection. In
a NationalAccess
coverage area,
incoming calls go to
voicemail.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
130
BroadbandAccess Connect
Creating a Bluetooth partnership between your
smartphone and your computer
0
1. Make sure that your computer’s Bluetooth setting is on and that
your computer is ready to create a Bluetooth partnership. Check
the documentation that came with your computer to find and
change these settings.
2. On your smartphone, go to Applications
Bluetooth
3. Select On if it is not selected, and then select Setup Devices.
and select
.
4. Select Trusted Devices.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
131
BroadbandAccess Connect
5. Select Add Device. The Discovery icon appears, indicating that the
discovery process is active.
6. Select your computer from the Trusted Devices list, and then select
OK.
7. Enter a passkey on the Bluetooth Security screen, and then select
OK. The passkey can be any number of up to 16 characters.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT You must enter the same passkey on your
smartphone and your computer. We recommend that you use a
passkey of 16 digits where possible to improve the security of your
smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the
passkey to be deciphered.
8. Enter the same passkey number on your computer when
prompted.
9. Select Done, and then select Done again to return to the Bluetooth
screen.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
132
Connections with Bluetooth devices
Connections with Bluetooth devices
Did You Know?
Your Treo smartphone
does not support
wireless connections
to Bluetooth
With your smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth wireless technology, you can
connect to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as a headset, car kit,
printer, or GPS receiver, as well as to other smartphones and handhelds
that are equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. If your computer
is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can also
keyboards and stereo
headphones.
synchronize wirelessly or use your phone as a wireless modem.
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices that you trust to communicate
with your Treo smartphone. When communicating with trusted devices,
your Treo smartphone skips the discovery process and creates a secure
link as long as the device is within range. Bluetooth range is up to
30 feet depending on environmental conditions, including obstacles,
radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.
When you configure a headset as described previously in Connecting to
a Bluetooth headset or car kit, the headset is automatically added to
your trusted device list. Follow the steps in this section to add other
devices to your trusted device list, such as a friend’s handheld.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
133
Connections with Bluetooth devices
Requesting a connection with another Bluetooth
device
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
.
2. Select On.
3. If you haven’t already done so, enter a device name for your
smartphone. This is the name that appears on the other Bluetooth
device’s screen when it connects to your smartphone.
4. Select Setup Devices.
5. Select Trusted Devices.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
134
Connections with Bluetooth devices
6. Select Add Device. The Discovery icon appears, indicating that the
discovery process is active.
7. Select the Show pick list and select Nearby devices.
8. If the device you want to add doesn’t appear on the discovery
results list, make sure that the other device is ready to receive a
connection request (see the device’s documentation), and then
select Find More on your smartphone to search again.
9. Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device, and select OK.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and
GPS receivers, may have a built-in passkey; other devices may
provide a screen where you enter the passkey. We recommend
that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to improve the
security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more
difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. If the Bluetooth
device has a built-in passkey, see the device’s documentation for
the passkey.
10. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
135
Connections with Bluetooth devices
Accepting a connection from another Bluetooth device
Tip
0
For the smartphone to
be visible to Bluetooth
devices, the Bluetooth
setting must be set to
On and visibility must
be set to Visible or
Temporary. The
1. Go to Applications
2. Select On.
and select Bluetooth
.
smartphone screen
does not need to be
turned on.
3. If you haven’t already done so, enter a device name for your
smartphone. This is the name that appears on the other Bluetooth
device’s screen when it connects to your smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
136
Connections with Bluetooth devices
4. Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following:
•
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted
Device list to request a connection with your smartphone. Your
smartphone remains accessible to other devices until you turn
this option off.
•
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your
Trusted Device list to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two minutes. Your smartphone
reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to
other devices after two minutes.
•
Hidden: Allows only devices with which you have previously
formed a partnership to request a connection with your
smartphone. New devices cannot request a connection.
5. Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and
GPS receivers, may have a built-in passkey; other devices may
provide a screen where you enter the passkey. We recommend
that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to improve the
security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more
difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered. If the Bluetooth
device has a built-in passkey, see the device’s documentation for
the passkey.
6. OPTIONAL Check the Add to trusted device list box if you want to
form a partnership with the requesting device.
7. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
137
Playing media files
Camera and Camcorder
Tip
The camera defaults to
1.3 megapixel (1280 x
1024) resolution. The
camera also supports
VGA (640 x 480) and
QVGA (320 x 240)
resolution. The
Your Treo™ 700P smartphone comes with an easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-
megapixel camera with 2x digital zoom (camera version only). You can
use the camera to take and view pictures and videos and send them to
your friends and family. To add a personal touch to your smartphone,
use your pictures as your wallpaper in the Main View of the Phone
application, and as caller ID images.
camcorder defaults to
CIF (352 x 288)
If your smartphone doesn’t have a built-in camera, the sections in this
chapter about taking pictures and videos don’t apply to you. But you
can still receive and view pictures and videos, send pictures and videos
to other people as email attachments or multimedia messages (MMS),
and use pictures to personalize your smartphone (such as wallpaper or
picture caller ID; see Assigning a caller ID photo for details). You can
also move pictures and videos to a computer by synchronizing your
smartphone with your computer.
resolution and also
supports QCIF (176 x
144) resolution. To
view these settings,
press Menu with the
Camera or Camcorder
application open
before you take a
picture or capture a
video.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
138
Camera and Camcorder
Taking a picture
Tip
You can store pictures on your smartphone or on an expansion card.
To add an audio
caption later, open the
picture and then select
Audio Caption from
the Photo menu.
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Camera
.
2. By default, the Camera application stores pictures you take in the
PALM folder on your smartphone. To store a picture in a different
location, select one of the following:
Did You Know?
You can personalize a
picture. Open the
Photo menu, select
Draw on, and then use
the drawing tools to
add your own
•
<Album name>: Stores the picture in
the selected album. The storage
location is based on the location of
the album (smartphone or expansion
card).
personal touch. When
you save the picture,
you can replace the
original or save a copy.
•
New Albums: Opens a dialog box
where you can enter an album name
and select the storage location
(smartphone or expansion card).
3. OPTIONAL Adjust the zoom setting by pressing Up
or pressing Down to select 1x.
to select 2x
4. Point the lens on the back of your smartphone at the subject you
want to photograph.
5. Press Center
to capture the picture.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
139
Camera and Camcorder
6. Do any of the following:
Saves the picture in the location you selected in step 2.
Deletes the picture.
Opens an MMS message, so you can send the picture to a
phone number or email address that supports picture
messages.
Lets you add a voice caption.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
140
Camera and Camcorder
Recording a video
Tip
You can store videos on your smartphone or on an expansion card.
The video recording
screen displays the
approximate
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Camcorder
.
recording time you
have left based on the
space available on
your smartphone or
expansion card. Actual
recording time may
vary depending on
how fast you are
moving, how many
colors you are
2. By default, the Camcorder application stores videos you record in
the PALM folder on your smartphone. To store a video in a
different location, select one of the following:
•
<Album name>: Stores the video in
the selected album. The storage
location is based on the location of
the album (smartphone or expansion
card).
recording, and so on.
•
New Albums: Opens a dialog box
where you can enter an album name
and select the storage location
(smartphone or expansion card).
Tip
Tap and drag the
progress indicator bar
to jump to a different
section of the video.
Select Pause to pause
video playback.
3. Adjust the position of your smartphone until you see the subject
you want to record on the screen.
4. Press Center
to start recording.
5. After you finish recording, press Center
again to stop.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
141
Camera and Camcorder
6. Select any of the following:
Plays the video, so you can review it.
Saves the video in the location you selected in step 2.
Deletes the video.
Opens an MMS message, so you can send the video to a
phone number or email address that supports video
messages.
Opens a dialog box where you can adjust the volume during
playback.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
142
Camera and Camcorder
Customizing your Camera settings
You can customize the built-in camera’s settings for your Treo 700P
smartphone.
0
1. Go to the Camera View or Camcorder View.
2. Open the menus
. If you are in Camera View, the Photo
Settings screen appears. If you are in Camcorder View, the Video
Settings screen appears.
3. Set any of the following preferences:
•
Effects: Sets the color palette for the current picture or video.
You cannot change an item’s palette after you take the picture
or video.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the sound that plays before
you take the picture.
Shutter sound: Determines whether a sound plays when you
take a picture.
Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the microphone on and off so
that you can record videos with or without sound.
Resolution: Sets the default size for newly captured pictures or
videos.
Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines whether the date the
picture is taken appears on your pictures.
Review photos/videos: Determines whether you can review
pictures or videos before saving them and how quickly they
are automatically saved.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
143
Camera and Camcorder
Pics&Videos
Viewing a picture
Tip
In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera,
you can view pictures captured on many popular digital cameras or
downloaded from the Internet. Your smartphone supports the following
picture formats:
To view an album from
an expansion card,
insert the card and
select the album from
the Album list. If the
items on the card are
not grouped into
•
•
•
JPG
TIF
albums, select the card
name from the list.
BMP
GIF
Did You Know?
When viewing a
picture, you can
optimize the picture’s
position on the screen
by tapping and
•
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Select the album that contains the picture you want to see.
3. Select the picture you want to view.
dragging with the
stylus.
4. Press Right or Left to scroll to the next item in the album.
5. If the picture has a voice caption, select
to hear it.
Tip
6. Tap the picture or press Center
View.
to return to the Thumbnail
In Thumbnail View,
you can group photos
or videos to more
easily locate them.
Select one of the
grouping options from
the View menu.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
145
Camera and Camcorder
Viewing a video
In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camera,
you can view videos captured on many popular digital cameras. Your
smartphone supports the following types of video files:
Did You Know?
If you pause video
playback and then
close the video, the
video starts where you
left off the next time
you play it.
•
•
•
•
•
•
3GP
3G2 (MPEG-4 video + QCELP audio + .3g2 file type)
MP4
MPG
M4V
ASF (with MPEG-4 video and IMA-ADPCM audio)
AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)
•
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Select the album that contains the video you want to see.
3. Select the video you want to view. Playback begins automatically.
4. Hold down Right or Left to seek within the current video, or
press Right or Left to scroll to the next item in the album.
5. Press Center
to return to the Thumbnail View.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
146
Camera and Camcorder
Viewing a slide show
Tip
0
To set slide show
options such as
1. Go to Applications
and select Pics&Videos
.
2. Highlight (or open) the album you want to view.
3. OPTIONAL Open the menus , select Options, and then select
Auto-hide Toolbar Off if you want to see the toolbar.
background music and
transitions, open the
Options menu and
select Slideshow
Setting. Keep in mind
thatbackground music
overrides audio
4. Press Space
5. Press Center
to start the slide show.
to return to the previous view.
captions when you’re
running a slide show.
Background music for
a slide show also
overrides any music
that might be playing
using the Pocket Tunes
application on your
smartphone if you
start a slide show.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
147
Camera and Camcorder
Sending pictures or videos
and video messaging or to an email address.
You cannot send
copyrighted pictures
or videos that appear
with a Lock icon in the
Thumbnail View or
Picture list.
0
1. From the Album list, select the album that contains the picture(s)
or video(s) you want to send.
2. Tap
in the lower-right corner of the screen.
Tip
3. Select the pictures or videos to send, or select Select All to send
the entire album. (A + sign appears next to selected items.)
You can also send
pictures and videos as
email attachments or
using your
4. Select Share.
smartphone’s built-in
Bluetooth wireless
technology.
5. Enter any text you want to add to the message.
6. Address and send the message. (See Creating and sending a
multimedia message for details.)
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
148
Camera and Camcorder
Copying a picture or video
You can copy pictures or videos into another album. You can also copy
pictures and videos between your smartphone and an expansion card.
Tip
You can also move
pictures and videos
between albums.
Open the Photo (or
Video) menu and
select Move to. The
remaining steps are
the same as copying
pictures, but use the
Move commands
instead of the Copy
commands.
0
1. From the Album list, select the album that contains the picture(s)
or video(s) you want to copy.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Copy to from the Photo (or Video) menu.
4. Select the pictures or videos to copy, or select Select All to copy
the entire album. (A + sign appears next to selected items.)
5. Select Copy.
6. Select the Copy items to pick list and select whether you want to
copy the selected items to your device or to an expansion card.
+ sign indicates a
picture is selected
7. Select the Into album pick list and select the album you want to
copy the selected items to.
8. Select Copy.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
149
Camera and Camcorder
Organizing pictures and videos
1. Open the album you want to organize.
Did You Know?
You can also open the
Album list from the
Camera View or
0
2. Open the menus
.
Camcorder View by
selecting the icon in
the lower-right corner.
3. Select Album, and then select Add to album or Remove from album.
4. Select the pictures or videos to add or remove, or select Select All
to add or remove the entire album. (A + sign indicates that you
want to add the item. An X sign indicates that you want to remove
the item.)
Tip
®
Install the Palm Files
application from the
Palm Software
5. Select Add or Remove.
Installation CD to
easily browse and
manage files on an
expansion card.
Saving a picture as wallpaper
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper for the Main View in the
Phone application.
Tip
0
1. Open the picture you want to save as wallpaper.
To change the name,
add a caption, or view
other picture or video
information, highlight
(or open) the item,
open the Photo (or
Video) menu, and
select Details.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Save as Wallpaper.
4. When the confirmation message appears, confirm by selecting
Yes, or decline by selecting No.
Adding a picture to a contact entry
0
1. Open the picture you want to add to a contact.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Save as Contact.
4. Select the contact you want to add this picture to.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
150
Camera and Camcorder
Rotating a picture
0
1. Open the picture you want to rotate.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Rotate from the Photo menu.
4. Select the orientation.
Deleting a picture or video
Tip
0
You can also highlight
a picture or video in
the Thumbnail View,
and then press
1. Open the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want
to delete.
2. Open the menus
.
Backspace to delete
the highlighted item.
3. Select Delete from the Photo (or Video) menu.
4. Select the pictures or videos that you want to delete, or select
Select All to delete the entire album. (An X sign appears next to
selected items.)
5. Select Delete.
6. Select Delete to confirm the deletion.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
151
Camera and Camcorder
Viewing pictures and videos on your computer
Tip
When you synchronize your Treo 700P smartphone, your pictures and
videos are copied to your desktop computer. You can view pictures in
JPEG format and videos in MPEG-4 format (.3G2 file extension). You
can email them to friends using your desktop email application.
Videos are captured in
the 3GPP2 format,
which has the 3G2 file
type extension.
On a Windows computer, you can view and edit synchronized pictures
and videos in the Palm Media desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop
software and click the Media icon. You can refer to the Palm Desktop
Online Help for information about using the Palm Media desktop
application.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
152
Pocket Tunes™
™
Pocket Tunes
[
!
]
Before You Begin
Mac You need an
expansion card (sold
separately) to listen to
music on your
You can listen to music through the speaker on the back of your
smartphone or through stereo headphones (stereo headphone adapter
or 2.5mm stereo headphone required, sold separately). To listen to
music on your smartphone, you need to convert the music files into
MP3 format using Windows Media Player (Windows computers) or
iTunes (Mac computers), and then transfer the music files to your
smartphone or an expansion card. After you transfer the music files,
smartphone. You
cannot transfer MP3
files from your Mac
directly onto your
smartphone.
™
you can play them using the Pocket Tunes application on your
smartphone.
Tip
You can change the
settings on your
smartphone so that
pressing and holding
the Side button opens
Pocket Tunes. See
Reassigning buttons
for details.
Setting up Windows Media Player for MP3
On a Windows computer, you need to set Windows Media Player to
save your music files in MP3 format in order for the files to be
compatible with Pocket Tunes.
0
1. Connect your smartphone to your computer with the sync cable.
2. Go to Applications
and select pTunes
.
Did You Know?
If a call comes in when
you’re listening to
music, you can take
the call and the music
pauses automatically.
After you finish the
call, the music starts
again.
3. On your computer, open Windows Media Player, and then click the
full-screen icon in the upper-right corner to maximize the window.
4. Click Tools, and then click Options.
5. Click the Rip Music tab, click the Format pick list, and then select
mp3. Click OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
153
Pocket Tunes™
6. Click Tools, and then click Options.
7. Click the Devices tab, select Palm Handheld from the Devices list,
and then click Properties.
Select your
smartphone
Click
Properties
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
154
Pocket Tunes™
8. Click the Quality tab, uncheck the Convert files as required by this
handheld (recommended) box. Click Apply.
Uncheck
box
9. Click OK, and then click OK again.
You now have set up Windows Media Player to transfer MP3 files to the
Pocket Tunes application on your smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
155
Pocket Tunes™
Setting up iTunes for MP3
Tip
On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X) to convert music from a CD
to MP3 format. For more information on using the iTunes software, see
the documentation that came with your Mac.
Mac If you want
greater control over
the file size and sound
quality of your MP3
files, select Custom
from the Setting pop-
up menu.
0
1. On your Mac, open iTunes.
2. Select Preferences.
3. Click the Advanced button at the top of the window, and then click
Importing.
4. Click the Import Using pop-up menu and select MP3 Encoder.
5. OPTIONAL Click the Setting pop-up menu and select Good
Quality.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
156
Pocket Tunes™
Transferring MP3 files from your computer
Tip
The Pocket Tunes software that comes with your smartphone is
compatible with the popular MP3 audio file format. If your MP3 files are
already on your computer’s hard drive, you need to transfer them to
your smartphone to listen to them on your smartphone.
Windows Do not
press the sync button
on your cable.
WindowsMediaPlayer
transfers the files, so
there’s no need to do
anything.
If an expansion card is inserted into the smartphone, Windows Media
Player copies the MP3 files to the expansion card. If you don’t have an
expansion card inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your smartphone’s
memory.
Did You Know?
You can also use a card
reader accessory (sold
separately) to transfer
MP3 files from your
computer to your
expansioncard. Create
a Music_Audio folder
in the root directory of
the card, and store
your MP3 files in this
folder.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT You must synchronize your smartphone with your
computer at least once before you can transfer MP3 files from your
computer.
0
1. Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB
sync cable.
2. On your smartphone, go to Applications
and select pTunes
.
3. OPTIONAL Insert an expansion card into your smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
157
Pocket Tunes™
4. Do one of the following:
•
Windows: Open Windows Media Player on your
computer. Select the Sync tab, and then select Palm
Handheld from the drop-down list. Select Start
Sync. The files are transferred to your smartphone.
•
Mac: Drag and drop the MP3 files onto the Send To Handheld
droplet in the Palm folder. Select your device name, the file
name, and the destination (card). Click OK. Synchronize your
smartphone with your computer. Be patient; transferring
music to an expansion card can take several minutes.
Transferring music from a CD to your smartphone
If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your
smartphone, you need to convert them to MP3 format on your
computer before you transfer the files to your smartphone.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1. On your computer, open Windows Media Player.
2. Insert the music CD into your computer’s CD drive.
3. Select the Rip tab.
4. Select the tracks you want to convert to MP3.
5. Select Rip Music.
6. Transfer the MP3 files to your smartphone as described in
Transferring MP3 files from your computer.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
158
Pocket Tunes™
MAC ONLY
0
1. On your Mac, open iTunes.
2. Insert the music CD into the CD drive on your Mac.
3. Check the boxes next to the tracks you want to convert to MP3.
4. Click the Import button in the upper-right corner of the iTunes
window.
5. When the songs are finished importing, click the Eject Disk button
in the lower-right corner of the iTunes window.
6. Transfer the MP3 files to your smartphone as described in
Transferring MP3 files from your computer.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
159
Pocket Tunes™
Listening to music on your Treo smartphone
Tip
0
You can upgrade
Pocket Tunes to a
version that supports
more music file
formats (such as
WMA) supports
streaming MP3, and
subscription music,
and that includes
additional features.
For more info, visit
1. Go to Applications
and select pTunes
.
2. Do any of the following:
•
To play or resume playback of the current song, select Play
.
•
•
•
To play the next song, select Next Song
.
To play the previous song, select Previous Song
.
To play a different song, select Choose Song
song from the list.
and select a
•
•
To adjust the volume during playback, press the Volume button
on the side of your smartphone.
Tip
If you don’t hear
anything when you
play a song, make sure
the Ringer switch is
not set to the Sound
Off position. See
Silencing sounds for
more information.
To pause playback select Pause
.
Progress indicator
Play/Pause
Next song
Volume
Choose Song
Did You Know?
You can also press
Space to pause and
resume playback, as
well as use the 5-way
to navigate among
songs or pause and
resume playback.
Previous song
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
160
Pocket Tunes™
Pocket Tunes continues playing until it reaches the end of your list or
until you select Pause . Music continues to play even if you switch to
another application or turn off your screen. If you want to stop playing
music when you exit Pocket Tunes, open the Background Prefs menu
and uncheck the Enable background play box, and then select OK.
Creating a playlist
If you want to play a group of songs in a particular order, you can create
Tip
To play songs from a
playlist, open Pocket
Tunes, select Choose
Songs, and then select
Playlists. Select the
playlist you want to
play, and then select
All.
a playlist.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
and select pTunes
.
.
3. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.
4. Select New, and then enter a name for the playlist.
5. Select Add Song. Select the songs you want to include on the
playlist.
6. Select Save List.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
161
Pocket Tunes™
Editing a playlist
Tip
0
To delete a playlist,
select Manage
1. Go to Applications
and select pTunes
.
2. Open the menus
.
Playlists from the
Actions menu, select
the playlist, and then
select Delete List.
Select Yes to confirm
the deletion.
3. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.
4. Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.
5. Do any of the following:
•
•
•
To delete a song from the playlist, select the song and then
select Remove.
To add a song, select Add Song, check a song’s box, and then
select Done.
To move a song up or down one slot, select a song and then
select Up or Down.
6. Select Save List.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
162
Staying organized
Contacts
Tip
If you have several
contacts to enter, it’s
more efficient to use
Contacts is where you enter information about people you know. You
can access this info from the Phone application to dial phone numbers
and create favorites, and from the Messaging and email applications to
send messages. When you create a contact, you can also assign a
photo and ringtone ID to that contact, so you know when they call you.
®
Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft
Outlook on your
computer and then
sync your smartphone
with your computer.
For more info see
Synchronizing
information—the
basics.
Tip
You can also open
Contacts from the
Applications View. Go
to Applications and
select Contacts.
Did You Know?
If your company uses
Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003, you may
be able to sync
Contacts directly with
the server. See
Synchronizing using
Microsoft Exchange
®
ActiveSync for info.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
163
Contacts
Adding a contact
Tip
0
You can assign a
1. Press Phone
.
ringtone to an entire
category of contacts.
For example, use the a
special ringtone for
categories such as
Family, Work, or Golf
Buddies. Select the
category pick list in the
upper-right corner,
select Edit Categories,
and then select the
category. Select the
ringtone on the Edit
Category screen.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.
3. Select New Contact.
4. Use the 5-way navigator to move between fields as you enter
information.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
164
Contacts
5. OPTIONAL Do any of the following:
•
Add a caller ID photo: Select the Picture box, and then do one of
the following:
•
Select Camera to take a picture and add it to this contact
when you save the picture.
•
Select Photos to add an existing picture to this contact.
•
•
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the Ringtone pick list and select
a ringtone from the list to give incoming calls from this contact
a distinctive ring.
Place the entry in a category or mark it private: Select Details.
(See Working with private entries for more info.)
•
•
Add a note to an entry: Select Note
.
Display additional fields for this contact: Select Plus
.
6. After you enter all the information, select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
165
Contacts
Viewing or changing contact information
Tip
0
In the Contacts list,
press Up or Down on
the 5-way to move
to the previous or next
Contacts record.
1. In the Contacts list, begin entering one of the following for the
contact you want to view or edit:
•
•
•
First name (JOH for John)
Last name (SMI for Smith)
Tip
First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith)
After you define your
business card, you can
beam it to other Palm
2. Select the name of the entry you want to open.
3. Select Edit.
®
OS devices. In any
4. Make changes to the entry as necessary, and then select Done.
Phone view or the
Contacts application,
open the Record menu
and select Beam
Deleting a contact
0
Business Card.
1. Open the contact you want to delete.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Delete Contact from the Record menu, and then select OK.
Defining your business card
0
1. Create a new contact and enter your own business card info.
2. Open the contact entry containing your business card info.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Business Card from the Record menu.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
166
Calendar
Calendar
Tip
If you have several
appointments to enter,
it’s more efficient to
use Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft
Outlook on your
computer and then
synchronize your
Treo™ 700P
Calendar is a powerful organizer application that helps you manage
your schedule. You can view your calendar by day, week, or month, or
as an agenda list that combines your Tasks list and email notifications
with your appointments. Schedule repeating meetings or block out a
vacation by creating one event set to repeat at an interval you specify.
Color-code your appointments by category and add notes with helpful
information.
smartphone with your
computer. For more
information, see
Synchronizing
Displaying your calendar
•
Press Calendar
repeatedly to cycle through the various views:
information—the
basics.
•
Agenda View: Shows your daily schedule
and any items on your Tasks list that are
overdue or due today. If there’s room,
Agenda View also shows your schedule
for the next dates with events scheduled.
Did You Know?
If your company uses
Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003, you may
be able to synchronize
Calendar events
•
•
Day View: Shows your daily schedule one day at a time.
Week View: Shows your schedule for an entire week. The time
frames are based on the Start Time and End Time settings in
Calendar Preferences.
directly with the
server. See
Synchronizing using
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync for
•
Month View: Shows your schedule for a whole month.
®
•
•
•
From any Calendar view, open the Options menu and select Year
View to view a calendar for an entire year.
information.
From any Calendar view (except Agenda View), use the 5-way to go
to another day, week, month, or year (based on the current view).
From any Calendar view (except Agenda View), select Go To, and
then select a date from the calendar.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
167
Calendar
for
Creating an event
Tip
0
To automatically
1. Press Calendar
until Day View appears.
assign a time zone to
your events, open the
Options menu, select
Preferences, and check
the New events use
time zones box. All
your new events will
be assigned to your
local time zone
2. Press Left or Right to select the desired day.
Selected
date
Selected
day
(existing events aren’t
affected), and you can
change the time zone
setting for individual
events.
3. Select New.
4. Using the keyboard, enter a starting hour and minute for the
event, such as 545 for 5:45.
Tip
If you want your
5. Select the End Time box and enter the ending hour and minute for
the event.
events with time zones
to stay at the same
time in Calendar,
regardless of the time
zone you are in,
6. OPTIONAL To assign a time zone to the event, select the Time
Zone pick list and select a city in the time zone you want.
uncheck the Get time
zone from mobile
network box on the
Date & Time
7. Select OK.
8. Enter a description for the event.
Preferences screen. If
the box is checked, the
event time shifts if you
travel to a different
time zone. See Setting
the date and time for
information.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop software, do not add time
zones to your events. Palm Desktop does not support time zones.
If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use the time zone feature, but you
must install the conduit that came with your Treo 700P smartphone (or a
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
168
Calendar
subsequent update) on all the computers with which you sync your
smartphone. Chapura PocketMirror and other earlier Microsoft Outlook
conduits do not support time zones.
Adding an alarm to an event
Did You Know?
When an alarm occurs,
the Alert screen
0
1. In Calendar, select the event.
2. Select Details.
displays all your
pending alerts. Select
an alert description to
jump to that item, or
check the box to clear
that alert.
3. Check the Alarm box and select the number of minutes, hours, or
days before the event you would like to receive the alarm.
4. Select OK.
Type of time units
Number of time units
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
169
Calendar
Creating an untimed event
Tip
An untimed event, such as a holiday or deadline, does not occur at a
The alarm for untimed
events is defined by
minutes, days, or
hours before midnight
of the date of the
event.
particular time.
0
1. Press Calendar
until you are in Day View.
2. Press Left or Right to go to the date of the event.
3. Make sure no times are highlighted.
4. Enter a description for the event. A diamond appears next to the
description of an untimed event.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
170
Calendar
Scheduling a repeating event
1. Create an event, and then select it.
Did You Know?
If you sync with
0
Microsoft Outlook and
your events include
otherpeople, aWithfield
appears in the Details
dialog box and your
attendee info appears in
this field after you sync.
2. Select Details.
3. Select the Repeat pick list, and then select a repeat interval. If the
interval you need doesn’t appear on the list, select Other to define
a custom interval.
Tip
To enter a birthday or
anniversary, add this
info to the person’s
Contacts entry and it
automatically appears in
your Calendar.
Tip
4. Select OK.
To enter a holiday, create
an untimed event. Then,
from the Details screen,
select Every year as the
repeat interval.
This icon indicates
a repeating event.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
171
Calendar
Color-coding your schedule
Use color-coding to quickly spot various types of events. For example,
make appointments with family green, coworkers blue, and friends red.
Follow these steps to create a category and assign it a color-code.
0
1. From Day View, select an event description or select an empty
timeslot.
2. Select Details.
3. Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories.
4. Do one of the following:
•
To create a new category, select New and then enter a category
name.
•
To add a color to an existing category, select a category and
select Edit.
5. Select the color you want to give this category, and then select OK.
6. OPTIONAL Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add or edit more categories.
7. Select OK two more times.
Now that the categories are set up with colors, you can assign
categories to your events to color-code them. See the next section for
details.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
172
Calendar
Editing or deleting an event
Tip
0
To save memory, you
can purge your old
events. Open the Record
menu and select Purge.
Select the Delete events
older than pick list and
select a time frame.
Select OK.
1. Select the event you want to edit or delete.
2. Select Details.
3. In addition to the settings covered earlier in this chapter, you can
also change any of the following settings:
•
Date and Time: Displays when the event takes place. Change
these settings to reschedule the event.
•
•
•
•
Location: Provides a description of where the event takes place.
Category: Sets the color-coded category for this event.
Note
: Provides space for you to enter additional text.
Delete: Removes the event from your calendar.
4. Select OK.
Customizing display options for your calendar
Tip
0s
You can customize
your smartphone to
display the most
current Calendar event
in the Main View in the
Phone application.
Press Phone, open the
Options menu, and
then select Phone
DisplayOptions. Check
the Show Calendar
event box.
1. Open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Display Options.
3. Select the Default View pick list and select the view you want to
see when you open Calendar.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
173
Calendar
4. Select the Agenda box and set any of the
following options:
•
•
•
Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are due
today and the tasks that are overdue
appear in Agenda View.
Show Messages: The number of read
and unread email messages displays in
Agenda View.
Background: A favorite photo becomes the Agenda View
background. Check the Background box, select the image
placeholder, and then select a photo. Adjust the fade setting so
that the text is easy to read against the photo.
5. Select the Day box and set any of the
following Day View options:
•
•
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Day View.
Show Time Bars: The time bars appear
in Day View to show the duration of an
event and to illustrate event conflicts.
•
•
Compress Day View: When this box is
unchecked, all time slots appear on the screen. When this box
is checked, start and end times appear for each event, but
blank time slots near the bottom of the screen disappear to
minimize scrolling.
Show Category Column: The color-coded category marker
appears between the time and the description to indicate
under which category the event is filed.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
174
Calendar
6. Select the Month box and set any of the
following Month View options:
•
•
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Month View.
Timed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific time appear in
Month View.
•
•
Untimed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific date but not a
specific time appear in Month View.
Daily Repeating Events: The events that repeat every day
appear in Month View.
7. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
175
Calendar
Selecting alarm tones
Did You Know?
Your smartphone
includes a silent alarm
that can vibrate even
when the Ringer
switch is set to Sound
Off.
0
1. Open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.
3. Select the Application pick list and select Calendar.
4. Select the Volume pick list and select the volume level.
5. Select the Vibrate pick list and select an option for how you want
your smartphone to vibrate for an event alarm.
Tip
You can also record
sounds and use them
as alarms. Select
Manage on the Sound
& Alerts Preferences
screen.
6. Select tones from any of the following pick
lists:
•
Alarm Sound: The tone played the first
time your alarm goes off.
•
Reminder Sound: The tone played if an
alarm is not acknowledged and
the alarm repeats itself.
•
To record a sound,
select New.
•
To play a sound,
select it and press
Center on the 5-way.
•
•
Repeat: The number of times the alarm
repeats itself if the alarm is not acknowledged.
•
To delete a sound,
Default Alarm: A default for the number of minutes, hours, or
days before the event for which the alarm goes off.
select it and press
Backspace.
7. Select Done.
•
To send a sound,
select it and then
select Send.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
176
Tasks
Tasks
Tip
You can set Tasks to
record the date that
you completed a task,
and you can select to
show or hide
completed tasks.
Completed tasks
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks you need to complete and to
keep a record of when you finish tasks.
Adding a task
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Tasks
.
remain in the memory
of your smartphone
until you purge them.
2. Select New to create a new task.
Tip
If you turn on the
Show Due Dates
option in the Tasks
Preferences screen,
you can select the due
date in the Tasks list to
set a new date.
3. Enter a description of the task. The text can be longer than one
line.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
177
Tasks
Setting task priority, due date, and other details
The Details dialog box enables you to assign a priority level, due date,
category, privacy flag, and other details for each task.
Tip
Open the menus to
access other features
such as importing
phone numbers into
the Tasks list.
0
1. Select the task to which you want to assign details.
2. Select Details.
3. Set any of the following:
Tip
You can also select the
priority from the Tasks
list by selecting the
number next to a task
and then selecting a
priority level.
•
Priority: Select the priority number for
this task (1 is most important). Later you
can arrange your tasks based on the
importance of each task.
•
•
Category: Assign the task to a specific
category.
Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list
and select a due date for the task.
•
•
Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.
Repeat: Indicate whether the task occurs at regular intervals
and how often it repeats. When you check off a repeating task,
the next instance of this task automatically appears in your
task list.
•
•
Private: Check this box to mark this task private. See Working
with private entries for additional information.
: Select this button to enter additional text that you want to
associate with the task.
4. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
178
Tasks
Checking off a task
Tip
0
If you accidentally
check off a task and
need to uncheck it,
highlight the task
again and press Center
on the 5-way to
1. Select the task you want to check off.
2. Press Center
or tap in the box to check off the task.
uncheck it.
Organizing your tasks
Did You Know?
Overdue tasks have an
exclamation point (!)
next to the due date.
In the Tasks list, select one of these options:
•
•
All: Displays all your tasks.
Date: Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. Select the
Date pick list (in the title bar) to select Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next
7 Days, or Past Due.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
179
Tasks
•
Category: Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category.
Select the Category pick list to select a different category.
Deleting a task
Tip
0
To save memory, you
can purge all
completed tasks. Open
the Record menu and
select Purge. Select
OK.
1. Select the task you want to delete.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Delete Task from the Record menu.
4. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
180
Tasks
Customizing Tasks
Did You Know?
The Tasks Preferences screen enables you to control the appearance of
You can display your
tasks in your calendar.
See Customizing
display options for
your calendar for
details.
the Tasks list screen.
0
1. In the Tasks list screen, open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3. Set any of the following preferences:
•
Sort by: Indicates the order in which your tasks appear in the
list.
•
•
Show Completed Tasks: Displays tasks you’ve checked off.
Record Completion Date: Replaces due date with the completion
date when you complete (check off) the task.
•
Show Due Dates: Displays task due dates and inserts an
exclamation point (!) next to overdue tasks.
•
•
•
Show Priorities: Displays the priority setting for each task.
Show Categories: Displays the category for each task.
Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the alarms you assign to
your tasks.
4. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
181
Memos
Memos
Did You Know?
Each memo can
include 4,096
Memos are a great way to store notes on your Treo 700P smartphone.
characters of text.
Creating a memo
0
Tip
1. Go to Applications
and select Memos
.
You can assign
2. Enter the text you want to appear in the memo.
3. Select Done.
categories to your
memos. Open the
memo you want to
change, select the
category pick list at the
top of the screen, and
select a category.
Deleting a memo
0
1. Select the memo you want to delete.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Delete Memo from the Record menu.
4. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
182
Staying productive
de
®
Documents To Go Professional
Tip
For more info on the
Documents To Go®
desktop application,
click the Documents To
Go icon on your
[ * ] NOTE The PalmSoftware Installation CD includes the Documents
To Go desktop software. On your smartphone, the companion
applications for Documents To Go is named Documents.
computer, and then
click Help, or go to
With the Documents application, you can take your important office info
with you. You can carry, create, view, and edit Microsoft Word and Excel
files directly on your smartphone. You can also view, carry, and manage
PowerPoint and PDF files. For example, you can open email
attachments, files you download with the web browser, and files stored
on an expansion card—as long as the files are in a supported format.
Tip
Install the Files
application from the
Palm Software
Installation CD to
easily browse and
manage files on an
expansion card.
If you install the Documents To Go desktop software (from the Palm
Software Installation CD), you can use Documents To Go to transfer files
to your smartphone when you synchronize.
Here are a few more examples of what you can do with Documents:
•
•
•
Send and receive email attachments in Word, Excel, PowerPoint,
and Acrobat file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT,
and PDF).
Create or edit a Word-compatible document or Excel-compatible
spreadsheet on your smartphone, and then save it in the native
DOC or XLS format.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
183
Documents To Go® Professional
•
Create a PowerPoint presentation on your computer, use the
Documents To Go desktop application to optimize the file for your
smartphone, and then sync the file onto your smartphone. View or
edit the file on your smartphone, and then sync again to transfer the
changes to the original PowerPoint file on your computer.
[ * ] NOTE The Documents application does not support some editing
functions, such as multiple font sizes and spell checking.
Opening a document
Tip
In the Documents application, you can view and open any Word, Excel,
PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your smartphone or an expansion
card that is inserted in the expansion slot.
0
When you work on a
file on your
smartphone, you can
save it to your
smartphone or an
expansion card. Open
the File menu, select
Save As, and then
select the location
where you want to
save the file.
1. Go to Applications
and select Documents
.
2. Select the document you want from the list.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
184
Voice Memo
Voice Memo
Voice Memo provides a place for you to record and play back notes and
other important thoughts directly on your smartphone.
Creating a voice memo
Did You Know?
You can assign the Side
button to the Voice
When recording a voice memo, face your smartphone’s screen while
speaking.
Memo app so that you
can simply press and
hold the Side button to
begin recording (see
Reassigning buttons).
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Voice Memo
.
2. Do either of the following:
•
•
Press and hold the Side button on your smartphone while
recording your memo. After you finish recording, release the
Side button.
Tip
If you need to pause
while recording, press
and hold Center on the 5-
way. Release the button
to resume recording.
Press and release the Side button on your smartphone. After
you finish recording, press the Side button again.
The memo is automatically saved to your smartphone.
3. OPTIONAL Enter a title for the memo.
Did You Know?
Your recording pauses
automatically when you
receive a call. If you
ignore the call, you can
press Record to resume
recording. If you answer
the call, recording stops
and saves; you cannot
resume a previous
recording; you must start
another voice memo.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
185
Voice Memo
Listening to a voice memo
Tip
0
To adjust the volume
level, press the
Volume button on the
side of your
1. Go to Applications
and select Voice Memo
.
2. In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the voice memo title and then
press Center
to select it. The voice memo begins to play.
smartphone.
Tip
To change a voice
memo title, open the
VoiceMemomenuand
select Rename Memo.
Did You Know?
You can send a voice
memo in an email or
MMS message (see
the documentation for
youremailapplication,
or Creating and
3. Press Center
to pause or stop playback.
sending a multimedia
message). You can
also use Bluetooth
wireless technology to
send a voice memo to
a nearby Bluetooth
device (see Sending
info over a Bluetooth
wireless connection).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
186
Calculator
Calculator
Did You Know?
You can tap the
onscreen number pad
or use the keyboard to
input numbers.
Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus an advanced calculator with
scientific, financial, and conversion functions.
Switching between Basic and Advanced
Tip
Calculator Modes
In Basic Mode, you can
also press Right on the
5-way to switch to
Advanced Mode. In
AdvancedMode, press
Right on the 5-way to
cycle between
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
and select Calc
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.
functions, and press
Left on the 5-way to
return to Basic Mode.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
187
Calculator
Selecting functions in Advanced Calculator Mode
Tip
0
Select Sto to store a
number in one of ten
memory slots. Select
Rcl to recall a stored
number.
1. Switch to Advanced Mode (see the preceding procedure).
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select the type of function you want to
use:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Math: Advanced mathematical functions such as exponents,
roots, and logarithms.
Trig: Trigonometric functions such as sine, cosine, tangent, and
variants.
Finance: Financial calculator functions such as APR and
amortization.
Logic: Hexadecimal characters in keypad, plus logic functions
such as And, Not, Or, and Xor.
Statistics: Statistical functions such as sum, factorial, and
random number generator.
Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature conversions for metric
and English values.
Tip
Select Con to access a
list of mathematical
constants such as
Avogadro’s number or
the speed of light.
•
•
Length: Length conversions for metric and English values.
Area: Area conversions for metric, traditional, and English
values.
•
Volume: Volume conversions for metric and English values.
4. Open the menus
.
5. Select Pref, and then select the decimal display format: Float,
Fixed(x), Sci(x), or Eng(x).
6. Open the menus
.
7. Select Pref, and then select the number display format: Degrees,
Radians, or Grads.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
188
World Clock
World Clock
World Clock displays the day and time in three cities anywhere around
the globe. Whether you’re traveling or staying home, it’s easy to keep
track of the best time to reach your business associates, friends, and
family in faraway places.
Selecting cities
Tip
World Clock shows the system date and time above the world map. If
you selected the option to get the date and time from the mobile
network (see Setting the date and time), the Verizon Wireless network
automatically updates the time display to match the local time when
you travel.
If you did not select the
option to get the date
and time from the
mobile network, then
you can set the city at
the top of the screen to
a fixed location.
Below the world map you can view the time in two other cities. If you
travel a lot you may want to select your home city as one of these two
cities, so that you always know what time it is at home.
0
Did You Know?
You can run your stylus
over the map to see the
time in other cities. The
shadow over the map
represents nighttime
moving across the
globe.
1. Go to Applications
and select World Clock
.
2. Select a City pick list, and select a city in the same time zone.
Tip
World Clock does not
automatically update
the system time for
daylight savings time.
To change the Daylight
Savings Time setting,
see Setting the date
and time.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
189
World Clock
Adding cities
If the city you want to display is not in the predefined list, you can
add it.
0
1. Select a City pick list and select Edit List.
2. Select Add.
3. Select a location in the same time zone as the city you want to add,
and then select OK.
4. Enter the name of the city.
5. Select Location, select Map, select the location of the city, and then
select OK.
6. If the city is not on Daylight Savings Time, uncheck this box. If
Daylight Savings Time is observed, enter Start and End dates.
7. Select OK.
Setting an alarm
Tip
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a hotel alarm clock to get you to
that important meeting. Use your smartphone instead. World Clock
includes a built-in alarm feature that you can use as a travel alarm.
Tocustomize the alarm
sound and volume,
open the Options
menuandselectAlarm
Preferences.
0
1. Select Off in the upper-right corner.
2. Select the time you want the alarm to sound.
3. Select OK.
Tip
Make sure the ringer
switch is set to Sound
On, so that you can
hear the alarm.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
190
Managing files and
applications
Using Find
Did You Know?
Find locates any word
that begins with the
text you enter. For
example, entering
“plan” finds “planet,”
but not “airplane.
The Find feature locates any text in the built-in applications and
databases and in some third-party applications. The Find feature
searches for the group of characters you specify, including characters
that are part of a word. Find is not case sensitive.
0
1. Press Option , and then press Shift/Find
dialog box.
to open the Find
2. Enter the text you want to find.
3. Select OK to start the search.
4. In the search results, select the text you want to review, or select
Find More to continue the search.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
191
Installing applications
Installing applications
Your Treo™ 700P smartphone comes with several built-in and ready-to-
use applications. You can also install additional applications, such as
business software, games, and more. The Palm Software Installation CD
includes several bonus software apps and you can purchase other third-
party Palm OS® apps as well. To learn about applications you can add to
[ * ] NOTE The instructions in this section tell you how to install basic
PRC (Palm OS application) and PDB (Palm OS database) files on your
Treo smartphone. Some Palm OS software uses an installer or wizard to
guide you through the process. For details, consult the documentation
that came with the software.
Installing bonus software from the CD
The Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software
applications that you can install on your smartphone. You can install
these applications when you install the desktop software, or you can
install them later.
0
1. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your
computer.
2. Click Install bonus software.
3. Click the name of the application you want to install.
4. Click Install (on the right side of the screen).
5. OPTIONAL Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional applications.
6. Synchronize your smartphone with your computer to install the
application(s) on your Treo smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
192
Installing applications
Installing applications from the Internet
You can use the web browser on your smartphone to install Palm OS
files (PRC or PDB) directly from the Internet. When you download a PRC
or PDB file, it is automatically installed on your smartphone. If a file is
compressed (ZIP or SIT files), you need to download it to your
computer and expand the file before installing it on your smartphone.
0
1. Open the web browser (see Viewing a web page).
2. Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to
download.
3. Press Left or Right to highlight the link to the file, and then
press Center
to initiate the download process.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to accept and install the
application.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
193
Installing applications
[
!
]
Before You Begin
When you download an application to your computer, it is probably in a
compressed format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is compressed,
you need to use a decompression utility on your computer, such as
WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander, before you install the application on
your smartphone.
To install an app from
your computer to your
Treo smartphone,
you must first install
Palm Desktop software
on your computer (see
Installing the desktop
synchronization
0
1. Windows: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the Palm Quick
software).
Install icon on the Windows desktop.
Tip
Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the Send To Device
You can open a window
to select whether to
install files on your
smartphone or on an
expansion card.
Windows: Double-click
the Palm Quick Install
icon.
droplet in the Palm folder.
2. Select your device name from the User list, and then click OK.
3. Synchronize your smartphone with your computer to install the
application(s) on your Treo smartphone.
Getting help with third-party applications
Mac: Open the HotSync
menu and select Install
Handheld files.
If you encounter a problem with a third-party application (such as an
error message), contact the application’s author or vendor. For general
troubleshooting of third-party applications, see Third-party
applications.
Tip
On a Windows
computer, you can also
access Palm™ Quick
Install by selecting the
Quick Install icon in
®
Palm Desktop
software or from the
Programs folder in the
Start menu.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
194
Removing applications
Removing applications
Did You Know?
Some applications are
factory-installed on
your smartphone and
cannot be deleted.
If you decide that you no longer need an application, or you want to free
up memory, you can remove apps from your smartphone or an
expansion card (for more on expansion cards, see Inserting and
removing expansion cards). You can remove only apps, patches, and
extensions that you install; you cannot remove the built-in apps that
reside in the ROM portion of your Treo smartphone.
0
These are listed with a
Lock icon next to them.
Tip
If you upgraded from a
previous version of
Palm Desktop
software, your backup
folder may be located
in the palmOne or
Handspring folder.
1. Go to Applications
.
2. If you want to remove an application from an expansion card,
insert the card into your Treo smartphone.
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Delete on the App menu.
5. Select the Delete From pick list and select the location of the
application you want to remove: Phone or Card.
Did You Know?
Applications deleted
from your smartphone
are kept on your
6. Select the application that you want to remove.
7. Select Delete.
computer in the
8. Synchronize to remove the application from the Backup folder on
your computer.
Archive folder of your
user folder. If you’re
having trouble
locating your user
folder, see I can’t find
my user folder.
Manually deleting applications
If an app you delete reappears on your smartphone, you may need to
manually delete the app from your computer.
0
1. Go to Applications
.
2. If you want to remove an application from an expansion card,
insert the card into your Treo smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
195
Viewing application info
3. Open the menus
.
4. Select Delete on the App menu.
5. Select the Delete From pick list and select the location of the
application you want to remove: Phone or Card.
6. Select the application that you want to remove.
7. Select Delete.
8. Synchronize to remove the application from the Backup folder on
your computer.
Viewing application info
The Info screens display basic statistics about the applications on your
Treo smartphone.
0
1. Locate your Backup folder on your computer.
•
•
Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\<Device Name>.
Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<Device Name>.
If you upgraded from a previous version of Palm Desktop, your
backup folder may be located in the palmOne or Handspring
folder.
2. If you find a PRC or PDB file for the application you just removed,
delete the file from the Backup folder.
3. Delete the file from your device again.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
196
Viewing application info
4. At the bottom of the screen, select the type
of information you want to view:
•
Version: The version numbers of
applications on your smartphone.
•
Size: The size (in kilobytes) of
applications and information on your
smartphone.
•
Records: The number of entries in
various applications on your smartphone.
5. Scroll to the application you want to see info about.
6. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
197
Sending information with Bluetooth wireless technology
Sending information with Bluetooth
wireless technology
Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless connection
Tip
In most applications you can send an individual entry or item such as a
contact or a picture. You can also send all the entries in a category, such
as all contacts in the Business category. When you send a category, the
items within the category appear in the Unfiled category on the
receiving device.
Bluetooth range is up
to 30 feet in optimum
environmental
conditions.
Performance and
range may be affected
by physical obstacles,
radio interference
from nearby electronic
equipment, and other
factors.
0
Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
.
1.
2. Select Bluetooth On.
3. Open an application.
4. Select the entry or category you want to send.
5. Open the menus
Tip
.
The Device Name in
the Bluetooth app is
the name other
6. Select Send from the leftmost menu.
7. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
devices with Bluetooth
wireless technology
see when they connect
to your smartphone.
The default name is
Palm Device. You can
change this name if
you want to.
8. Select the receiving device(s) in the Discovery Results View, and
then select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
198
Sending information with Bluetooth wireless technology
Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless connection
Did You Know?
When you receive an
application over a
0
Go to Applications
and select Bluetooth
.
1.
2. Select Bluetooth On.
3. Go to Applications
4. Open the menus
Bluetooth connection,
you can store the
application on your
smartphone or send it
to an expansion card
inserted into the
.
.
5. Select Send from the App menu.
6. Select the Send From pick list and select whether the app you want
to send is located on your smartphone or on an expansion card.
expansion card slot.
Tip
7. Select the application you want to transfer. You cannot send an
Check your battery
level before
item that has a lock
next to it.
establishing a
8. Select Send.
Bluetooth wireless
connection. If the
battery level is very
low, you can’t make a
Bluetooth wireless
connection.
9. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
10. Select the receiving device(s) on the Discovery Results screen, and
then select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
199
Sending information with Bluetooth wireless technology
Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless connection
0
Go to Applications
2. Select Bluetooth On.
3. Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following:
and select Bluetooth
.
1.
•
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted
Device list to request a connection with your smartphone. Your
smartphone remains accessible to other devices until you turn
this option off.
•
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your
Trusted Device list to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two minutes. Your smartphone
reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to
other devices after two minutes.
4. Use the other device to discover your smartphone and send
information to it:
•
See the other device’s documentation to learn how to discover
and send information over a Bluetooth wireless connection.
•
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, your smartphone
beeps to notify you of the connection, and then prompts you
to accept the info. Select a category or expansion card to file
the item. If you don't select a category, the item goes into the
Unfiled category.
5. Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
200
Beaming information
Beaming information
Tip
For best results, the
path between the two
devices must be clear
of obstacles, and both
devices must be
stationary. If you have
difficulty beaming,
shorten the distance
and avoid bright
sunlight.
Your Treo 700P smartphone is equipped with an IR (infrared) port so that
you can beam information to another Palm OS® device with an IR port.
The IR port is located on the top of your smartphone, between the
antenna and the Ringer switch, behind the small dark shield.
Beaming an entry
Tip
You can beam an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture.
You can also beam all the entries in the selected category, such as all
the contacts in the Business or Family category.
Beam your business
card in two key
presses: From the
Main View in the
Phone application,
open the menus, and
then press the “M”
key.
0
1. Select the entry or category you want to beam. You cannot beam
an item that has a lock
2. Open the menus
3. Select Record, and then select one of the following:
next to it.
.
Did You Know?
If you beam a
bookmark or saved
page from the web
browser, it beams the
URL, not the contents
of that page.
•
•
Beam: Sends an individual record.
Beam Category: Sends all entries in the current category.
4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on
your Treo smartphone directly at the IR port of the receiving
device.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
201
Beaming information
5. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is
complete before you continue using your smartphone.
Beaming an application
Did You Know?
You can store a
beamedapplicationon
your smartphone, or
send it to an expansion
card inserted into the
expansion card slot.
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock icon
appears on the
Beam screen next to applications that cannot be beamed.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
.
.
3. Select Beam from the App menu.
4. Select the Beam From pick list, and select whether the application
you want to beam is located on your Treo smartphone or on an
expansion card.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
202
Beaming information
5. Select the application you want to transfer.
6. Select Beam.
7. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on
your smartphone directly at the IR port of the receiving device.
8. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is
complete before you continue using your smartphone.
Receiving beamed information
Tip
0
If you do not select a
category upon
receiving a beamed
item, the item
is placed in the Unfiled
category.
1. Turn on your screen.
2. Select the beam command on the transmitting device.
3. Point the IR port on your Treo smartphone directly at the IR port of
the transmitting device to open the Beam Status dialog box.
4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, select a category for
the entry.
Tip
If you can’t receive
beamed information,
make sure the Beam
Receive option is
turned on (see
5. Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it.
Optimizing power
settings), and that you
are not running a third-
party application that
disables beaming. If
you still can’t receive a
beam, try a soft reset
(see Resetting your
smartphone).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
203
Beaming information
Synchronizing information—advanced
Changing which applications sync
By default, information from Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos,
and Tasks is updated each time you synchronize your smartphone with
Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook. You can change which
applications synchronize. For example, if you don’t use the Memos
application and you want to speed up synchronization, you can turn off
synchronization for Memos.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
204
Beaming information
WINDOWS ONLY
0
Tip
1. Click the HotSync manager icon
corner of your screen.
in the taskbar in the lower-right
Windows If you set
up your smartphone to
sync with Outlook, you
can learn how to
change which
2. Select Custom.
3. Select your device name from the User list at the top of the screen.
applications
4. Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization
on or off, and then click Change.
synchronize, by doing
the following: Click the
®
5. Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an app.
HotSync manager
icon in the taskbar and
select Custom. Select a
conduitthatsyncswith
Outlook, click Change,
and then click Help.
Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an app that
currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for
Memos if you do not use this app).
Tip
Windows Tokeepthe
current sync setting on
an ongoing basis,
check the Set as
default box. If you do
not check this box, the
option you select
applies only the next
time you synchronize.
Thereafter, info is
updated according to
the default setting.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
205
Beaming information
[ * ] NOTE Select one of the two overwrite options if you want
the information in one location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the other location for that
app. For example, if the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your computer has become corrupted,
select Handheld overwrites desktop for the Calendar app to have
your smartphone info replace your computer info. Note that
“handheld” refers to your smartphone and “desktop” refers to
your computer.
6. OPTIONAL Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which
you want to turn synchronization on or off.
7. Click OK, and then click Done.
MAC ONLY
0
Tip
1. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon
in the Palm folder.
Mac To keep the
current setting on an
ongoing basis, select
Make Default. If you do
not select this button,
the option you select
applies only the next
time you synchronize.
Thereafter, info is
2. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.
3. From the User pop-up menu, select your device name.
4. Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization
on or off, and then click Conduit Settings.
updated according to
the default setting.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
206
Beaming information
5. Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an app.
Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an app that
currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for
Memos if you do not use this app).
[ * ] NOTE Select one of the two overwrite options if you want
the information in one location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the other location for that
app. For example, if the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your computer has become corrupted,
select Handheld overwrites desktop for the Calendar app to have
your smartphone info replace your computer info. Note that
“handheld” refers to your smartphone.
6. OPTIONAL Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which
you want to turn synchronization on or off.
7. Click OK, and then close the Conduit Settings window.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
207
Beaming information
Setting up a Bluetooth connection for synchronization
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you
Tip
For the smartphone to
be visible to Bluetooth
devices, the Bluetooth
setting must be turned
on and visibility must
be set to Visible or
Temporary. The
can synchronize wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Select On.
and select Bluetooth
.
smartphone’s screen
does not need to be
turned on.
Tip
After you form a
partnership with a
device, you can
change the Visibility
setting to Hidden. That
way only devices with
which you’ve already
formed a partnership
can find your
3. Enter a device name for your smartphone. This is the name that
appears on the other Bluetooth device’s screen when it connects to
your smartphone.
4. Select Setup Devices.
smartphone. New
devices cannot
request a connection.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
208
Beaming information
5. Select HotSync Setup.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership between
your smartphone and your computer. In some cases you may
need to perform setup steps on your computer before you can
complete this step. Check your computer’s documentation for
specific setup instructions.
7. After you finish the HotSync Setup, select Done to return to the
Applications View.
You’re now ready to sync your smartphone with your Bluetooth
computer.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
209
Beaming information
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth connection
When you synchronize using your smartphone’s Bluetooth wireless
feature, you don’t need your sync cable. This is especially useful if you
travel with a laptop enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology.
0
1. Go to Applications
and select HotSync
.
2. Select Local.
3. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and then select the
name of the PC you set up for Bluetooth synchronization (see
Setting up a Bluetooth connection for synchronization).
4. Select the HotSync icon
on your smartphone.
When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of
your smartphone screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few
minutes.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
210
Beaming information
Synchronizing over an infrared connection
When you synchronize using your smartphone’s IR port, you don’t need
your cable. This is especially useful if you travel with an IR-enabled
laptop.
[
!
]
Before You Begin
Your computer must
include the following
items:
•
An enabled IR port
WINDOWS ONLY
and driver or have an
IR device attached to it.
Check your computer’s
documentation to see
if it supports IR
0
1. On your computer, click the HotSync manager icon
in the
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make sure that
Infrared is selected.
communication.
•
HotSync Manager
must be active. On a
Windows computer,
you know HotSync
manager is active
when its icon appears
in the lower-right
corner of your screen.
2. On your smartphone, go to Applications
HotSync
3. Select Local.
and select
.
4. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC/
Handheld.
5. Position the IR port of your smartphone within a few inches of the
IR port of your computer.
6. Select the HotSync icon
on your smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
211
Beaming information
When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of
your smartphone screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few
minutes.
MAC ONLY
0
1. Double-click the HotSync manager icon
in the Palm folder.
2. Click the HotSync Controls tab, and then select Enabled.
3. Click the Connection Settings tab, and then check the On box next
to IR port.
4. Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
5. On your smartphone, go to Applications
HotSync
6. Select Local.
and select
.
7. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a
PC/Handheld.
8. Position the IR port of your smartphone within a few inches of the
IR port of your computer.
9. Select the HotSync icon
on your smartphone.
When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of
your smartphone screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few
minutes.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
212
Beaming information
Synchronizing using Wireless Sync
In addition to allowing you to send and receive email messages, the
Wireless Sync application works with the Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and
Memos applications on your smartphone to directly access corporate
groupware information on a Microsoft Exchange or Lotus Domino
server. You can wirelessly synchronize business email, calendar info,
and contact info on the server from your smartphone without using a
desktop computer.
Wireless Sync interacts with your desktop software as follows:
•
Microsoft Outlook: Info in Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and the
Wireless Sync application on your smartphone does not sync
directly with Outlook on your desktop. However, if the Exchange
server synchronizes with Outlook on your desktop, any new or
updated info you enter in these applications on your smartphone
also appears in Outlook after the next server sync.
[ * ] NOTE The Memos application is called Notes in Outlook.
•
Lotus Notes: Info in Calendar, Contacts, and the Wireless Sync
application on your smartphone does not sync directly with Notes
on your desktop. However, if the Domino server synchronizes with
Notes on your desktop, any new or updated info you enter in these
applications on your smartphone also appears in Notes after the
next server sync.
[ * ] NOTE Depending on how your company has set up its Lotus
Notes environment, info in the Tasks and Memos applications on
your server may synchronize directly with Notes on your computer,
or it may sync with the server.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
213
Beaming information
•
Palm Desktop software: Info in Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Memos,
and the Wireless Sync application on your smartphone does not
sync with and does not appear in Palm Desktop on your desktop.
®
Synchronizing using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® works with the VersaMail®, Calendar,
and Contacts applications on your smartphone to directly access
corporate groupware information on a Microsoft Exchange 2003 server.
If you install VersaMail from the Palm Software Installation CD and your
company uses Microsoft Exchange 2003 server, you may be able to
wirelessly synchronize info in these applications on the server from
your smartphone without using a desktop computer.
A Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account interacts with your desktop
software as follows:
•
Microsoft Outlook: Info in Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail syncs
with the server, it does not sync directly with Outlook on your
desktop. However, if the server syncs with Outlook on your desktop,
any info you enter in these applications on your smartphone also
appears in Outlook after the next server sync.
•
Palm Desktop software: Info in Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail
does not sync with and does not appear in Palm Desktop software
on your computer.
[ * ] NOTE Info in other apps, such as Tasks and Memos, continues to
sync with and appear in the desktop software on your computer
(Outlook or Palm Desktop).
For complete information on using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
account, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm
Software Installation CD.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
214
Using expansion cards
Using expansion cards
Tip
SD cards are faster
than MultiMediaCard
cards for reading and
writing information,
and SD cards also offer
write-protection.
The expansion card slot on your Treo smartphone enables you to add
SD cards and MultiMediaCard cards to extend the storage capacity of
your smartphone. For example, SD or MultiMediaCard expansion cards
can store:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Photos
MP3 audio files
Email attachments
Games
eBooks
Microsoft Office files
Adobe Acrobat files
Applications
Databases
Your Treo 700P smartphone is also compatible with SDIO cards, which
you can use to add accessories, such as a presentation module, to
your smartphone.
Although expansion cards are sold separately, your smartphone
includes a dummy, nonfunctional card inside the expansion card slot to
keep out dust and other debris.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
215
Using expansion cards
Inserting and removing expansion cards
Tip
0
If the Ringer switch is
set to Sound On, you
hear a confirmation
tone when you insert
or remove an
1. Press down and release the dummy card.
2. After you feel the expansion card slot eject the dummy card,
remove the card from the slot.
expansion card.
Tip
When you’re not using
the expansion card,
reinsert the dummy
card to keep the
expansion card slot
clean.
3. Hold your smartphone with the screen facing you, and hold the
card with the label facing you. The notch on the card should be in
the lower-left corner next to the antenna.
4. Insert the card into the expansion card slot until you feel it lock into
place.
Notch
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
216
Using expansion cards
Opening applications on an expansion card
After you insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot, you can
open any of the applications stored on the expansion card.
0
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. The
Applications View automatically appears.
2. Select the icon for the application you want to open.
3. Press Center
to open the application.
Accessing items stored on an expansion card
When an expansion card contains items, such as pictures or songs, you
can access those items directly from the card.
Tip
Install the Files
application from the
Palm Software
Installation CD to
easily browse and
manage files on an
expansion card.
0
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. The
Applications View automatically appears.
2. Select the category pick list in the title bar, and select All.
3. Select the icon for the application in which you want to open the
item. For example, to view a picture, select Pics&Videos.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
217
Using expansion cards
Copying applications between an expansion card and
your smartphone
Tip
Before you copy an
application to an
expansion card, make
sure that it is
You can copy applications from your Treo smartphone to your
expansion card and vice versa.
0
compatible with Palm
OS software version
5.4.5 or later. Some
applications do not
work with expansion
cards and do not allow
you to store files in a
location that is
1. Go to Applications
.
separate from the
application.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Copy from the App menu.
4. Select the Copy To pick list and select the destination: card name
or Phone.
5. Select the From pick list and select the location of the application
you want to copy: card name or Phone.
6. Highlight the application you want to copy.
7. Select Copy.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
218
Using expansion cards
Viewing expansion card
information
The Card Info application displays general
information about the expansion card that is
currently in the expansion slot, and it enables
you to rename and format a card.
•
Go to Applications
Card Info
and select
.
Renaming an expansion card
If you change the contents of an expansion card, you may at some point
want to rename the card to better match its contents.
Tip
Before copying
information to,
renaming, or
0
formatting an
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.
expansion card, make
sure the card is not
write-protected. See
the instructions that
came with your card
for details.
2. Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select All.
3. Select Card Info
4. Open the menus
.
.
5. Select Rename Card from the Card menu.
6. Enter a new name for the card.
7. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
219
Using expansion cards
Formatting an expansion card
Formatting an expansion card is similar to formatting a disk on a
computer. When you format an expansion card, you erase all the
information stored on the card.
0
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.
2. Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select All.
3. Select Card Info
4. Open the menus
.
.
5. Select Format Card from the Card menu.
6. Enter a new name for the card.
7. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
220
Customizing your
smartphone
System sound settings
Did You Know?
Your smartphone
includes a silent alarm
that can vibrate even
when the Ringer
Silencing sounds
You can immediately silence all alerts, ringtones, music that plays
switch is set to Sound
Off. For info on setting
the vibrate option, see
the section on setting
alert tones in the
chapters that describe
the individual
through the built-in speaker, and system sounds by sliding the Ringer
switch to the Sound Off position. This does not mute the audio during a
phone call.
0
1. Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound Off
position. Your
smartphone vibrates once to let you know that you’ve turned
sounds off.
applications.
2. To hear all sounds again, slide the Ringer switch to the Sound
On
position.
When you slide the Ringer switch back
to the Sound On position, it restores the
previous sound settings.
Sound Off
Sound On
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
221
System sound settings
Setting system volume levels
Tip
You can set the volume level for system sounds, such as the tone that
If the Ringer switch is
set to Sound Off, the
ringer setting
plays when you synchronize.
0
overrides the sound
settings and all sounds
are turned off.
1. Go to Applications
and select Sounds
.
2. Select the Application pick list and select System.
3. Select the System Volume and Game Volume pick lists and select
the volume levels.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
222
Display and appearance settings
Display and appearance settings
Tip
To automatically set
the backlight to the
preset low setting,
press Option and then
press Menu.
Adjusting the brightness
Depending on the lighting conditions in which you’re using your
smartphone, you may need to adjust the brightness of the screen and
keyboard backlight.
Tip
0
You can also adjust the
backlight and set the
brightness duration
during a call in Power
Preferences. See
Optimizing power
settings.
1. Press Option , and then press Backlight
.
Backlight
2. Press Left and Right to adjust the brightness.
3. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
223
Display and appearance settings
Changing the screen font
You can change the screen font in Calendar, Contacts, Memos,
Messaging, Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary between
applications and some applications may offer fewer choices.
0
1. Open the application in which you want to change the font.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Font.
4. Select a font style. (In the web browser, select the Font size pick list
and select Large or Small.)
Small font
Large font
Small bold font
Large bold font
5. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
224
Display and appearance settings
Setting display formats
Formats Preferences enable you to select number conventions based
on geographic regions. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often
is expressed using a 24-hour clock. In the United States, time is
expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or a PM suffix. Many of the
built-in applications on your Treo smartphone use the Formats
Preferences settings.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Formats.
and select Prefs
.
3. Set any of the following preferences:
•
Preset to: The standard number
conventions for your country. When
you select a country, the other Formats
Preferences are automatically set to
that country’s conventions. You can
also edit each option individually.
•
Time: The time format. Select HH:MM
to display a 24-hour clock.
•
•
Date: The date format.
Week starts: The first day of the week (usually Sunday or
Monday).
•
Numbers: The format for numbers with decimal points and
commas.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
225
Display and appearance settings
Aligning the screen
Occasionally, your smartphone screen may need to be readjusted. If
this occurs, you may see the wrong feature being activated when you
tap the screen. To fix the problem, you can align the screen at any time.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Touchscreen.
and select Prefs
.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions and tap the screen where
indicated.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
226
Display and appearance settings
Changing the system color scheme
Tip
0
You can also set the
wallpaper for the Main
View in the Phone
application (see
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Color Theme.
and select Prefs
.
3. Select a color scheme from the list.
Customizing the Main
View in the Phone
application) and the
background for the
Calendar Agenda View
(see Customizing
display options for
your calendar).
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
227
Applications settings
Applications settings
You can change the Applications settings on your Treo™ 700P
smartphone so that you can easily access the applications you use most
often. You can arrange and display your applications by category,
reassign the buttons on your smartphone, and select default
applications for specific tasks.
Arranging applications by category
You can assign an application to a category and then display a specific
Tip
To create a new
category of applications in the Applications View.
category, select the
category pick list and
select Edit Categories.
Select New, and then
enter the category
name. Select OK to
close the dialog box,
and then select OK.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
.
.
3. Select Category on the App menu.
4. Select the pick list next to each application and select a category.
5. Select Done.
Did You Know?
If there is an expansion
card in the expansion
slot, the card appears
in the category pick list
and is treated as a
category when you
press Applications
repeatedly.
Displaying applications by category
Do one of the following:
•
•
Press Applications
repeatedly to cycle through the categories.
Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select a
category. Select All to display all of your applications.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
228
Applications settings
Selecting the applications display
By default, the Applications View displays each application as an icon.
As an alternative, you can view a list of applications. The list view is
particularly useful when you have so many applications in a category
that the applications fill up more than one screen.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Open the menus
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
4. Select the View By pick list and select List.
5. Select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
229
Applications settings
Reassigning buttons
Did You Know?
You canalsochoose an
application to open
with the sync button
on the USB sync cable.
To change this setting,
select HotSync on the
Buttons Preferences
screen.
With Buttons Preferences you can select which applications are
associated with the quick buttons and the Side button on your Treo
smartphone. You can assign a primary and secondary application to
each of the three quick buttons that open an application.
[ * ] NOTE We recommend that you keep the primary button
assignments on the factory settings until you become comfortable with
the features of your smartphone. If you do change the primary button
assignments, remember that the instructions in this guide and in the
other help features refer to the original button settings.
0
Tip
To restore all the
buttons and key
combinations to their
factory settings, select
Default.
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Buttons.
and select Prefs
.
3. Select the pick list next to the button, select the Option
+ Button
Did You Know?
Some third-party
applications
combination you want to reassign, or select the Press + Hold Side
button pick list, and then select an application.
automatically take
over a button when
you install the
application.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
230
Applications settings
Changing default applications
Sometimes one application looks for another
application to handle information (for
example, a mail application might open a
browser when you select a link in an email
message). Your smartphone comes with a
set of predefined applications to handle
email, messaging, and browser requests
from other applications. If you have more
than one application to handle these
requests on your smartphone, you can
specify which application you want to use for
each function.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Default Apps.
and select Prefs
.
3. Select each pick list and select the application you want to
associate with that function.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
231
Locking your smartphone and info
Locking your smartphone and info
Your Treo smartphone includes several features to protect your
smartphone from inadvertent use and keep your information private.
You can lock any of the following features on your smartphone:
•
Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the Keyguard feature to disable
the keyboard and all buttons to prevent accidental presses in your
bag or pocket.
•
•
Screen: You can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during
an active call or call alert.
Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your phone to require a password
to make calls. The built-in security software lets you make
emergency calls even if your phone is locked.
•
•
Smartphone: You can set your smartphone to require a password for
you to see any information on your smartphone.
Entries: You can mask or hide entries marked as private and set your
smartphone to require a password for viewing them.
Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so that you don’t accidentally
press buttons or activate items on the screen items while your
smartphone is in a pocket or bag.
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever the screen is off. Each time you
wake up the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to unlock the keyboard
and use your smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
232
Locking your smartphone and info
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:
0
1. When the screen is off, press Power/End
to wake up the
screen.
2. Press Center
to turn off Keyguard.
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns on, or you can disable this
feature altogether. To change the Keyguard settings, do the following:
Tip
If you disabled
0
Keyguard, you can
turn Keyguard on
manually by pressing
Option + Power/End
when the screen is on.
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Keyguard.
and select Prefs
.
3. Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and then do one of the
following:
•
Select how quickly you want Keyguard to turn on: When power
is turned off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30 seconds after
power off.
•
Select Disable to completely disable the Keyguard feature until
you turn it on again.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
233
Locking your smartphone and info
Locking your screen
Did You Know?
You can set your smartphone to automatically lock the screen’s touch-
When you check the
boxes to disable the
touchscreen during a
call, the touchscreen is
automatically enabled
again after you end the
call.
sensitive features in certain situations.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Keyguard.
and select Prefs
.
3. Check any of the following boxes:
•
Incoming calls received: Disables the screen when the phone
rings. You must use the 5-way to select the onscreen Answer
and Ignore buttons, or press Send
to answer the call or
Power/End to ignore the call.
•
On a call: Disables the screen after you answer a call. You must
use the 5-way to select the onscreen buttons during the call.
Use this setting to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen
buttons while you’re holding your smartphone near your ear to
speak.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
234
Locking your smartphone and info
Locking your phone (Phone Lock)
Tip
You can lock your phone to prevent unauthorized calls and use of other
wireless features. When your phone is locked, you must enter the
correct code to unlock it. You can still place emergency calls when your
phone is locked, however.
When Phone Lock is
turned on, other
people can still see the
info on your
smartphone, but they
cannot make or
answer phone calls or
use the other wireless
features without your
password.
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Lock.
4. OPTIONAL Select Advanced, enter up to three numbers that you
can dial when your phone is locked, and then select OK. You do
not need to enter 911 as one of the three numbers, because this
number is always available.
Tip
If you want to lock your
phone once in a while,
use the Immediately
option to lock your
phone on demand.
5. Select one of the following Phone Lock options:
•
On phone power off: Locks your phone each time you turn it off.
When this setting is active, you must enter your lock code each
time you turn your phone on again.
•
Immediately: Locks your phone when you select OK. The next
time you dial a number, you must enter your lock code to
unlock your phone. After that, you can continue to make calls
without entering your lock code, unless you select one of these
Phone Lock options.
6. When prompted, enter the lock code, and then select OK. (Unless
you changed your lock code, the lock code is the last four digits of
your phone number.)
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
235
Locking your smartphone and info
7. If you want to change the lock code, select Change Lock Code,
enter a new lock code, and then select OK. Repeat this step to
verify the new lock code.
8. Select OK.
If you selected Immediately in step 5, your phone locks right away. If
you select On phone power off, your phone locks the next time you
press and hold Power/End
to turn off your phone.
To disable the current Phone Lock settings:
0
1. Open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Phone Lock.
3. Uncheck the On phone power off box.
4. Enter your lock code to change this setting.
5. Select OK twice.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
236
Locking your smartphone and info
Locking your smartphone
Tip
To protect your personal information, you can lock your smartphone, so
that you need to enter your password to access any of your information
or use any of the features on your smartphone, including the phone.
You can, however, still make emergency calls when your smartphone is
locked.
After you create a
password, you can
lock your system
manually. Go to
Applications and
select Security. Select
Lock & Turn Off, and
then select Off & Lock.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT If you lock your smartphone, you must enter the exact
password to unlock it. If you forget the password, you need to perform
a hard reset to resume using your smartphone. Performing a hard reset
deletes all the entries in your smartphone. However, you can restore all
previously synchronized info the next time you sync (see Synchronizing
information—the basics).
Tip
To change your
password, select the
Password box, enter
your current
password, and then
enter the new
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Security
.
password. To delete
your password, select
the Password box and
then select Unassign.
2. Select the Password box.
3. Assign a password and a password hint.
4. Select the Auto Lock Device box.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
237
Locking your smartphone and info
5. When prompted, enter your password and select OK.
6. Select one of the following options:
•
Never: Prevents your smartphone from
locking automatically.
•
On power off: Locks your smartphone
when you turn off the screen, or when it
shuts off with the Auto-off feature.
•
•
At a preset time: Locks your smartphone
at a specific time of day.
After a preset delay: Locks your
smartphone after a period of inactivity.
7. Select OK.
8. Do one of the following:
•
•
Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your smartphone immediately.
Press Applications
to accept your settings and continue
using your smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
238
Locking your smartphone and info
Working with private entries
In most applications you can mark individual entries as private. All
private entries remain visible and accessible until you select the
Security setting. You have two Security setting options:
•
Hide Records: Private entries do not appear anywhere in the
application.
•
Mask Records: Private entries are replaced with a visual placeholder
where the entry would normally appear.
After you enable the mask or hide setting, any entries marked as private
are immediately hidden or masked. If you define a password, you must
enter it to display private entries. If you do not define a password, you
(or anyone else) can reveal private entries without a password.
0
1. Display the entry that you want to mark private.
2. Select Details.
3. Check the Private box.
4. Select OK.
Hiding or masking all private entries
Make sure the entries you want to mask or hide are marked private.
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Security
.
2. Select the Current Privacy pick list and select either Hide Records
or Mask Records.
3. If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
239
Locking your smartphone and info
Viewing all private records
You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden or masked.
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Security
.
2. Select the Current Privacy pick list and select Show Records.
3. If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.
Viewing private entries in a specific application
Open the application that contains the private entries you want to see.
0
1. Open the menus
.
2. Select Options, and then select Security.
3. Select the Current Privacy pick list and select Show Records.
4. Select OK.
5. If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
240
Locking your smartphone and info
®
Security and Palm Desktop software (Windows)
Tip
The Windows version of Palm® Desktop software observes the security
password for your Treo smartphone. If you forget your password, you
cannot view your information in Palm Desktop. If your smartphone is
unlocked, you can change your password on your smartphone, but all
entries marked as private are deleted. You can restore your private
entries the next time you sync.
If you want additional
security for
Palm Desktop files,
you may want to
purchase a third-party
solution.
Follow these steps to recover from a lost password:
0
1. Go to Applications
and select Security
.
2. Select the Password box.
3. Select Lost Password.
4. Select Yes.
Entering owner information
You can use Owner Preferences to record information that you want
to associate with your Treo smartphone, such as your name, company
name, and home phone number. If you lock your smartphone (see
Locking your smartphone), the Owner Preferences information appears
on the screen that requests your password to unlock it, and you must
also enter your password to change the Owner Preferences
information.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Owner.
and select Prefs
.
3. If you assigned a password with the Security application, select
Unlock, enter your password, and then select OK to continue.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
241
System settings
System settings
Setting the date and time
Tip
By default, your smartphone synchronizes the date, time, and time zone
with the network when your phone is on and you are inside a coverage
area. Date & Time Preferences enable you to manually set the date,
time, and location setting for your Treo smartphone.
0
If a city in the same
time zone is not on the
list, select Edit List,
select Add, select a city
in your time zone, and
then select OK. If
necessary, modify any
of the settings in the
Edit Location
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Date & Time.
and select Prefs
.
3. To manually set the date and time, uncheck the Get date & Time
from mobile network box. Select the Date field and select the date,
and then select the Time field and select the time.
dialog box, and then
select OK.
Did You Know?
If you uncheck the date
and time box, the time
zone box is disabled
and you cannot have
the network
automatically set the
time zone. However,
you can choose to
have the network set
the date and time, but
manually set the time
zone.
4. To manually set the time zone, uncheck the Get time zone from
mobile network box. If you unchecked the date and time box in
step 3, the time zone box is automatically unchecked. Select the
Set Location pick list, and then select a city in your time zone.
Tip
You can also set time
zones for Calendar
events. See Creating
an event.
5. Select OK.
6. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
243
System settings
Optimizing power settings
Tip
Power Preferences enable you to adjust settings to maximize your
You can also access
the brightness setting
by pressing Option + P.
To temporarily dim the
screen’s brightness,
press Option + Menu.
smartphone’s battery performance.
0
1. Go to Applications
2. Select Power.
and select Prefs
.
3. Set any of the following preferences:
•
Brightness: Sets the intensity of the
screen and keyboard backlights. Drag
the slider or press Left and Right
to adjust the brightness level.
•
Auto-off after: Determines how long
your screen stays on during a period
of inactivity. When there is no
interaction with the keyboard or
screen for the specified time period,
your smartphone turns off automatically.
•
•
On a call, dim backlight after: Determines how long the backlight
stays on at normal intensity during a phone call. After the
specified time period, the backlight dims to conserve power
during a long phone call.
Beam Receive: Determines whether your Treo smartphone is
ready to receive information over an infrared beam. If you
leave this option turned off, you must return to this screen to
turn on this option the next time you want to receive a beam.
4. Select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
244
Connection settings
Connection settings
Connecting to a virtual private network
Tip
If you want to use your Treo smartphone to access your corporate email
account or other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up
a virtual private network (VPN) on your smartphone. A VPN enables you
to log in to your corporate server through the company’s firewall
(security layer). You need a VPN client on your smartphone if your
smartphone and your company’s server are located on opposite sides
of the firewall.
For information about
third-party VPN client
software, see the Palm
Software Installation
CD or visit
Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is
required to access the corporate server. If a VPN is necessary, you must
purchase and install a third-party VPN client on your smartphone to use
this feature.
0
1. Install your third-party VPN client. See Installing applications
for details.
2. Go to Applications
3. Select VPN.
and select Prefs
.
4. Enter the settings provided by your corporate system
administrator.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
245
Troubleshooting
Upgrading
If you experience problems with your Treo™ 700P smartphone after
performing the upgrade steps in this guide, you may have incompatible
applications or settings that were not quarantined during the
installation process. These files reside in your Backup subfolder.
Incompatible applications or settings can lead to numerous issues,
including system resets and freezes. If you experience a problem after
upgrading, follow these steps to correct the problem:
0
1. Locate your user folder on your computer:
•
Windows: If your device name is one word, your user folder
name is the first six characters of your device name. If your
device name is two words, your user folder name consists of
the first six characters of the second word of your device
name, followed by the first letter of the first word. For
example, if your device name is John Smith, your user folder
is named SmithJ. Your user folder is usually located inside one
of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
•
Mac: Your user folder name is the same as your device name
and is usually found in this location:
Mac hard drive : Users : Your Mac username : Documents :
Palm : Users.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
246
Upgrading
2. Make a copy of your user folder and store it in a safe place.
•
Windows: Copy the folder and then paste it to your Windows
desktop.
•
Mac: Select the folder and Option-drag it to your Mac desktop.
3. Confirm that your copy includes the Backup subfolder and that all
the files in the original Backup subfolder are also in the copy of the
Backup subfolder.
4. Delete all files from the original Backup subfolder.
5. Perform a hard reset on your smartphone. See Resetting your
smartphone for instructions.
6. Sync your Treo 700P smartphone with your new desktop software
and be sure to select your existing device name from the User list.
7. Reinstall third-party apps from the copy of your Backup subfolder.
(See Installing applications for instructions.) We recommend that
you install one application at a time to help you identify the
application that caused the problem. We also recommend that you
do not install any applications that do any of the following:
•
•
•
Modify phone functions, such as ringtones, dialing, or caller ID
Replace organizer applications, such as Contacts or Calendar
Set data connection features, such as activating or ending data
connections
•
•
Provide web clipping features, such as PQA files
Provide instant messaging features
If you want to continue using these types of applications, please
contact the third-party developer for software updates and info
about compatibility with your Treo 700P smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
247
Desktop software installation
Desktop software installation
Tip
The Palm Software
If you are having trouble installing the desktop software, you may have
the wrong version of the software or some of your computer’s
resources may be unavailable. Follow these steps to retry the
installation.
Installation CD installs
software that lets you
synchronize using
®
Palm Desktop
0
software or Microsoft
Outlook for Windows.
If you want to
synchronize using a
different personal
information manager
(PIM), you must install
a third-party solution.
Contact the PIM’s
author or vendor to
learn if software
1. Make sure your computer profile includes administrator rights to
install software. In large organizations, these are usually granted
by the system administrator.
2. Restart your computer.
3. Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet
security applications.
4. Make sure you’re installing the software from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your new smartphone. Other
versions of the desktop software may not work with this Treo
smartphone.
is available for your
new Treo smartphone.
5. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD to restart the installation.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Always use the same language for your Treo
smartphone, your operating system, and your desktop software.
Otherwise, you may lose information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for mismatched language
setups.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
248
Resetting your smartphone
Resetting your smartphone
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your smartphone is not
responding or you have trouble synchronizing with your computer, a
soft reset may help. All your info is retained when you perform a soft
reset.
0
1. Press the battery door release button, and slide the battery door
downward to remove it from your smartphone.
2. Use the stylus tip to gently press the reset button on the back of
your smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
249
Resetting your smartphone
Performing a system reset
A system reset, also called a safe or warm reset, tells your smartphone
to stop what it’s doing and start over again without loading any system
extras. If your smartphone loops or freezes during or after a soft reset, a
system reset may help. Performing a system reset releases you from an
endless loop so that you can uninstall a third-party application that may
be causing the looping.
0
1. Press the Battery Door Release button, and slide the battery door
downward to remove it from your Treo smartphone.
2. While pressing and holding Up , use the tip of the stylus to
gently press the reset button on the back of your device.
3. When the logo screen appears, release Up
.
4. Delete the third-party application that you suspect is causing the
problem.
5. Perform a soft reset. The wireless features of your smartphone are
not available until you complete this step.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
250
Resetting your smartphone
Performing a hard reset
A hard reset erases all information and third-party software on your
Tip
Some third-party
Treo smartphone. Never perform a hard reset without first trying a soft
reset and a system reset. You can restore previously synchronized
information the next time you sync.
applications do not
create a backup on
your computer when
you synchronize. If you
perform a hard reset,
you may lose data in
these applications and
you will need to
A hard reset may tell you whether a problem stems from your
smartphone or from an application installed on it. If you do not
experience the problem after you perform a hard reset, the problem is
related to software you installed. See Third-party applications for
suggestions on diagnosing third-party software issues.
reinstall the
application after the
hard reset. Please
contact the
0
1. Press the Battery Door Release button, and slide the battery door
downward to remove it from your smartphone.
application’s
developer to find out
which data is backed
up during
2. While pressing and holding Power/End
, use the tip of the
stylus to gently press the reset button on the back of your
smartphone.
synchronization.
3. Continue pressing and holding Power/End
. When the logo
Tip
screen appears, release Power/End
.
If you do not see the
“Erase all data?”
message, the hard
reset was not
performed.Retrythese
procedure steps,
making sure to hold
Power/End until the
logo screen appears.
4. When the “Erase all data?” prompt appears, press Up
confirm the hard reset.
to
5. If a language selection screen appears, select the same language
you selected for your desktop software.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT Always use the same language for your Treo
smartphone, your operating system, and your desktop software.
Otherwise, you may lose information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for mismatched language
setups.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
251
Replacing the battery
Replacing the battery
Tip
Be sure to dispose of
your old battery
properly. In some
areas, disposal in
household or business
trash is prohibited.
Your Treo 700P smartphone comes with a replaceable battery. Be sure to
use a replacement battery that is recommended or sold by Palm and is
compatible with the Treo 700P smartphone. Failure to use the proper
battery may result in a risk of personal injury or product damage, and it
voids your smartphone warranty.
0
1. Press Power/End
to turn off the screen.
2. Press the battery door release button, and slide the battery door
downward to remove it from your smartphone.
3. Place a finger in the notch next to the battery, and lift up the old
battery at a 45-degree angle to remove it from the compartment.
Battery door
release button
Battery
contacts
Smartphone
contacts
Notch
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
252
Replacing the battery
4. Align the metal contacts on the new battery with the contacts
inside the battery compartment.
5. Insert the new battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle,
pressing it into place. Slide the battery door onto the back of the
smartphone until it clicks into place.
6. Connect your smartphone to the charger or sync cable.
7. Wait for your Treo smartphone to turn on, and then enable the
network time or set the date and time when prompted.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
253
Screen
Screen
The screen appears blank
0
1. When a call lasts longer than the limit specified in Power
Preferences, the screen dims automatically. In certain lighting
conditions, the screen may appear blank when this occurs.
Press any key except Power/End to restore the screen to normal
brightness. Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.
2. When a period of inactivity lasts longer than the limit specified in
Power Preferences, the screen turns off. Press and release
Power/End
to wake up the screen.
3. Look closely at the screen. If you can see a dim image, try
adjusting the screen brightness (see Adjusting the brightness).
4. If the screen is still blank, perform a soft reset (see Performing a
soft reset).
5. If the problem persists, connect your smartphone to the charger
(see Charging the battery) and perform a soft reset again.
6. If that doesn’t work, perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard
reset).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
254
Screen
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to taps or it
Tip
activates wrong features
To find carrying cases
that protect the screen
and other useful
0
1. Go to Applications
and use the 5-way to select Prefs
.
accessories, visit
2. Use the 5-way to select Touchscreen.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen.
4. Select Done.
5. If the problem persists, check for dirt between the screen and the
edge of the smartphone.
6. If you’re using a screen protector, make sure that it is properly
installed.
There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left corner
The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of the screen is the Alert screen
symbol. It appears when you have alarms or messages that you haven’t
acknowledged.
0
1. Press and hold Center
stylus.
or tap the blinking bell
with your
2. When the list of pending alerts appears, do any of the following:
•
•
Select the alert text to view the item and keep it in the list.
Check the box next to an alert to clear it from the list, and then
select Done.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
255
Synchronization
Synchronization
Tip
Every device needs a
unique name. Never
synchronize more than
one device to the same
device name on your
computer.
Synchronization backs up the information from your smartphone onto
your computer and vice versa. If you ever need to perform a hard reset
or otherwise need to erase all your information on your smartphone,
you can synchronize your smartphone with your computer to restore
the info. Similarly, if your computer crashes and your Palm Desktop info
is damaged, you can recover your info by synchronizing with your
smartphone. To make sure you always have an up-to-date backup of
your info, synchronize frequently.
This section describes synchronization between your Treo smartphone
and a desktop computer running Palm Desktop software. You can also
synchronize the information on your smartphone using Wireless Sync
or other third-party applications. See the separate documentation for
Wireless Sync or other applications for information on features and
configuration.
Before you attempt to synchronize, make sure you’ve installed the
desktop synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation
CD.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
256
Synchronization
I can’t find my user folder
Windows: If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the
first six characters of your device name. If your device name is two
words, your user folder name consists of the first six characters of the
second word of your device name followed by the first letter of the first
word. For example, if your device name is John Smith, your user folder
is named SmithJ. Your user folder is usually located inside one of the
following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
Mac: Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is
usually found in this location: Mac hard drive : Users : Your Mac
username : Documents : Palm : Users.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
257
Synchronization
Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync attempt
Tip
0
If you’re having
trouble trying to sync
using an IR or
Bluetooth connection,
try using the USB sync
cable instead. If this
solves the problem,
then check your IR or
Bluetooth settings(see
Synchronizing
USB port on your computer and on the bottom of your
smartphone (see Synchronizing information—the basics).
2. Make sure that HotSync manager is running:
•
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager icon
in the
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and
make sure that Local USB is checked. If you don’t see the
HotSync manager icon, click Start, select Programs, select
Palm, and then select HotSync Manager.
information—
advanced).
•
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac hard drive. Double-click
the HotSync manager icon
in the Palm folder. In the
Connection Settings panel, set the Local Setup port to
Palm USB.
3. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need
to complete the remaining steps.
4. Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset).
5. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need
to complete the remaining steps.
6. If problems persist and you’re synchronizing through a USB hub,
try connecting the sync cable to a different USB port or directly to
your computer’s built-in USB port.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
258
Synchronization
7. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need
to complete the remaining steps.
8. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm software. Click Start, select
Settings, select Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs,
select Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/Remove.
[ * ] NOTE Mac computers do not provide an option for
uninstalling Palm Desktop software. Contact Technical Support if
the problem persists after completing step 7.
9. Reboot your computer.
10. Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your smartphone.
Synchronization starts but stops without finishing
Tip
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS® device or received a system
error, such as Sys0505, there may be conflicts with software on your
smartphone.
The HotSync Log can
tell you when and why
synchronization
stopped. On a
0
Windows computer,
right-click the HotSync
manager icon in the
taskbar in the lower-
right corner of your
computer screen, and
then select View Log.
1. Locate your Backup subfolder and rename the folder (for example,
BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in the following locations might be
“Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on the device you’re
upgrading from:
•
•
Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\device name
Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\device name
2. Synchronize.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
259
Synchronization
3. If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party
applications one at a time by double-clicking a single file in the
original Backup subfolder that you renamed, and sync after each
application you install. If the problem recurs, delete the last
application you installed and report the problem to its developer.
4. (Windows only) If the Windows New Hardware Wizard appears,
the synchronization process may be timing out before the wizard
completes its job. Follow all instructions in the New Hardware
Wizard, and then sync again.
5. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start,
select Settings, select Control Panel, select Add or Remove
Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/
Remove.
[ * ] NOTE Mac computers do not provide an option for
uninstalling Palm Desktop software. Contact Technical Support if
the problem persists after completing step 3.
6. Reboot your computer.
7. Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
260
Synchronization
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t
appear where it should
Tip
Outlook subfolders
and public folders are
not accessible with the
included software. You
may wish to use a
third-party solution
instead.
0
1. Make sure you’re synchronizing with the intended desktop
personal information manager (PIM). The Palm Software
Installation CD enables you to choose whether you want to
synchronize with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for
Windows. Reinsert the installation CD and select “Change your
synchronization method” if necessary. If you use a different PIM,
you need to install third-party software to synchronize. For more
information, consult the company that makes the PIM.
Tip
(Outlook only) If you
want to sync your info
withaglobalExchange
Address Book, you
must copy the
addressestoyourlocal
ContactslistinOutlook
(right-click the
2. If multiple Palm OS devices are synchronizing with your computer,
make sure you are synchronizing with the correct device name. If
info is not appearing in Palm Desktop software, make sure the
correct device name is selected in the User list on the toolbar of
Palm Desktop software.
3. Open HotSync manager on your computer, and make sure the
necessary conduits are set to Synchronize the files.
addresses and select
Add to Personal
Address Book).
WINDOWS ONLY
4.
Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select
Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select
Palm Desktop software, and then click Change/Remove.
Tip
For more info on
Outlook conduits,
right-click the HotSync
manager icon in the
taskbar, select
Custom, select an app
with Outlook in its
name, and then select
Help.
MAC ONLY
Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm
Desktop software. Contact Technical Support if the problem
persists after completing step 3.
5. Reboot your computer.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
261
Synchronization
6. Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your smartphone.
7. (Outlook only) If you’re trying to synchronize offline, set your
Outlook Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available
offline.
I have duplicate entries in Microsoft Outlook
after I sync
0
1. Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the duplicate entries.
2. On your computer, go to the application with duplicate entries and
manually enter any info you added to your smartphone since the
last time you synchronized.
3. Right-click the HotSync manager icon
Custom.
in the taskbar, and select
4. Select an application that has duplicate entries and also has
Outlook in its name.
5. Click Change.
6. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.
7. If more than one application has duplicate entries, then repeat
steps 4 through 6 for each application with duplicates.
8. Click Done.
9. Synchronize your smartphone and your computer.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
262
Synchronization
My appointments show up in the wrong time
slot after I sync
If you create an appointment in the wrong time zone (i.e., your desktop
was set to the wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong time zone on
your smartphone. To be safe, enable local network time and avoid
assigning time zones to your appointments.
If you’re using Microsoft Outlook:
0
1. Make sure that you installed the Microsoft Outlook conduit that
came with your Treo 700P. If you’re not sure whether this software
is installed, reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm
Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone.
2. Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the wrong entries.
3. On your computer, manually enter any Calendar info you added to
your smartphone since the last time you synchronized.
4. Click the HotSync manager icon
Custom.
in the taskbar and select
5. Select an application that has both Calendar and Outlook in its
name.
6. Click Change.
7. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.
8. Synchronize your smartphone and your computer.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the Calendar Change HotSync
Action dialog box.
10. Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK.
You should now be able to assign time zones to your events without
encountering this problem.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
263
Synchronization
If you’re using Palm Desktop software:
0
1. On your smartphone, press Calendar
.
2. Open the menus
.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
4. Uncheck the New events use time zones box (if it’s checked).
5. On your computer, open Palm Desktop software and correct the
wrong entries.
6. On your computer, manually enter any Calendar info you added to
your smartphone since the last time you synchronized.
7. Click the HotSync manager icon
Custom.
in the taskbar and select
8. Select an application that has both Calendar and Outlook in its
name.
9. Click Change.
10. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.
11. Synchronize your smartphone and your computer.
12. Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the Calendar Change HotSync
Action dialog box.
13. Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK.
You should now be able to assign time zones to your events
without encountering this problem.
[ ! ] IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the future, do not assign time
zones to your events. Palm Desktop software does not support time
zones.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
264
Phone
Phone
Signal strength is weak
Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute,
issues. You can check signal strength by looking at the signal strength
indicator
in the title bar of the Main View in the Phone application.
The stronger the signal, the more bars that appear. If you are outside a
coverage area, no bars appear.
0
1. If you’re standing, move about ten feet in any direction.
2. If you’re in a building, move near a window. Open any metal
blinds.
3. If you’re in a building, move outdoors or to a more open area.
4. If you’re outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or
electrical wires.
5. If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo smartphone so that it’s level
with a window of your vehicle.
My smartphone won’t connect to the mobile network
0
1. Try the suggestions about signal strength described in Signal
strength is weak.
2. Turn off your phone and turn it on again (see Turning your phone
on and off).
3. Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
265
Phone
The other person hears an echo
•
Try decreasing the volume on your Treo smartphone to avoid
coupling or feedback on the other person’s end. This applies to both
the speakerphone and the earpiece.
•
Position the earpiece closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking
back to the microphone. Keep your hand away from the
microphone hole, which is on the bottom right side of the
smartphone.
•
If you’re using the speakerphone feature with your smartphone
lying on a flat surface, try turning the smartphone face down
(screen facing the surface).
I hear my own voice echo
Ask the person on the other end of the call to turn down the volume on
his or her phone or to hold the phone closer to his or her ear.
My voice is too quiet on the other end
•
Be sure to place the bottom of the Treo smartphone, or the hands-
free microphone, close to your mouth.
•
Check the signal strength indicator in the title bar of the Main View
in the Phone Application. If the signal is weak (few bars are
displayed), try the suggestions about signal strength described in
Signal strength is weak.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
266
Phone
I hear static or interference
Tip
Check the signal strength indicator in the title bar of the Main View in
the Phone Application. If the signal is weak (few bars are displayed), try
the suggestions about signal strength described in Signal strength is
weak.
For best performance,
keep your Bluetooth
headset and phone on
the same side of your
body.
If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free device, try the following:
•
quality degrades as the distance between your smartphone and
hands-free device increases. The effective range for a device varies
between manufacturers.
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the
smartphone and your hands-free device.
My smartphone hangs up when I hold it to my ear
You may be accidentally pressing the onscreen Hang Up All button with
your cheek. Try holding the smartphone so that your face doesn’t press
against the screen. If this is not convenient, you may want to disable the
screen’s touch-sensitive feature during active calls (see Locking your
screen).
My phone seems to turn off by itself
If a system error and reset occur, the Treo smartphone automatically
turns the phone on if it was on before the reset. However, if the
smartphone can’t determine if your phone was on before the reset, the
phone does not automatically turn on (see Turning your phone on and
off). If the problem persists and you’re using third-party applications,
see Third-party applications for additional suggestions.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
267
Hands-free devices
My smartphone makes or answers calls when it’s in a
bag or pocket
Items in your bag or pocket may be pressing the onscreen Answer
button or otherwise activating screen items. If this happens, be sure to
Tip
To find carrying cases
that can help prevent
your smartphone from
as other useful
accessories, visit
press Power/End
to turn off the screen before placing your
screen’s touch-sensitive feature during incoming calls (see Locking your
screen).
Hands-free devices
Tip
Bluetooth range is up
to 30 feet in optimum
environmental
I can’t make or receive calls using a Bluetooth
hands-free device
conditions.
Performance and
range may be affected
by physical obstacles,
radio interference
from nearby electronic
equipment, and other
factors.
Confirm all the following:
•
The device with Bluetooth® wireless technology is compatible with
your smartphone. Go to http://www.palm.com/us/support/
compatible devices.
•
•
Go to Applications
Bluetooth setting is On.
and select Bluetooth
. Make sure the
You have already formed a partnership between your smartphone
and your hands-free device, and that the hands-free device appears
in the Trusted Devices list. (see Connecting to a Bluetooth headset
or car kit).
•
•
Your hands-free device is charged and turned on.
Your Treo smartphone is within range of the hands-free device.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
268
Email
I hear static or interference when using my Bluetooth
hands-free device
Tip
For best performance,
keep your Bluetooth
headset and phone on
the same side of your
body.
•
Try moving your Treo smartphone closer to the hands-free device.
Audio quality degrades as the distance between your smartphone
and hands-free device increases. The effective range for a device
varies between manufacturers.
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the
smartphone and your hands-free device.
Some features of my Bluetooth hands-free device
don’t work with my smartphone
•
Check the Palm compatibility list at http://www.palm.com/us/
ensure that your device is compatible.
•
Check the documentation that came with your device or the
manufacturer’s website for information specific to your device.
Email
•
For troubleshooting info on Wireless Sync, go to:
•
For troubleshooting info on the VersaMail® application, see the User
Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm Software
Installation CD.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
269
Messaging
Messaging
I can’t tell if data services are available
Tip
When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main View of
the Phone application to indicate whether data services are available
and whether a data connection is active. See What are all those icons?
for a description of the icons that indicate that data services are
available.
If your phone is on and
you do not see any of
the data icons, then
data services are not
available in your
current location.
I can’t send or receive SMS text messages
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see Turning your phone on and
off).
•
Contact Verizon Wireless to verify that your plan includes SMS
messaging services, that these services have been correctly
activated, and that they are available at your location. Verizon
Wireless should be able to tell you if messaging services have been
experiencing transmission delays. Delays can also occur between
the time that a message is sent and the time it is received.
•
Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle text
messages.
•
If a text message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a
soft reset (see Performing a soft reset).
0
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
270
Messaging
I can’t send or receive MMS multimedia messages
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see Turning your phone on and
off).
•
Contact Verizon Wireless to verify that your plan includes MMS
multimedia messaging services, that these services have been
correctly activated, and that they are available at your location.
Verizon Wireless should be able to tell you if messaging services
have been experiencing transmission delays. Delays can also occur
between the time that a message is sent and the time it is received.
•
Make sure that either the NationalAccess
or BroadbandAccess
icon appears in the title bar of Main View of the Phone
application. If you do not see either of these icons, data services are
not available in your current location and you cannot exchange
MMS messages.
•
•
Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle
multimedia messages.
If a message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft
reset (see Performing a soft reset).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
271
Web
Web
I can’t tell if data services are available
Tip
When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main View of
the Phone application to indicate whether data services are available
and whether a data connection is active. See What are all those icons?
for a description of the icons that indicate that data services are
available.
If your phone is on and
you do not see any of
the data icons, then
data services are not
available in your
current location.
My smartphone won’t connect to the Internet
Your Treo 700P smartphone supports the NationalAccess and
BroadbandAccess wireless data networks. To connect to the Internet,
you must subscribe to and activate data services with Verizon Wireless,
and you must be in a location with data coverage.
0
1. Press and hold Power/End
to turn off your phone. Then
press and hold the same button to turn it back on again.
2. Press Phone
and look for either the NationalAccess
or
BroadbandAccess
icon in the title bar of the Main View.
3. If you see these icons, you are in a data coverage area. Try
connecting to the Internet again. If you do not see either of these
icons, go to Applications
the following steps.
, select Prefs
, and continue with
4. Select Network.
5. Select the Services pick list and select BroadbandAccess.
6. Select Connect.
7. If the connection is successful, go the web browser. If you still
can’t make a connection, perform a soft reset (see Performing a
soft reset).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
272
Web
8. If your phone did not turn on automatically, press and hold Power/
End
Internet.
to turn on your phone, and try connecting to the
9. Contact Verizon Wireless to verify the following:
•
•
•
•
Your subscription plan includes high-speed data services
Data services have been activated on your account
Data coverage is available in your location
There are no data service outages in your location
I can’t access a web page
First, make sure you have Internet access: Open the web browser and
try to view another web page you’ve loaded before. To ensure you’re
viewing the page directly from the Internet, open the menus
Go, and then select Refresh.
Tip
Your Treo smartphone
can open your email
application when you
select an email
address on a web
page. If nothing
happens when you
select the link, make
sure your email
application is already
set up.
, select
If you can view the other web page after you refresh it, but you still
can’t access the page you were originally trying to view, the page may
contain elements that are not supported by the web browser. These
include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript, WMLScript, and other plug-ins.
Some websites use a redirector to their true home page. If the web
browser on your smartphone can’t follow the redirector, try using a
desktop browser to see the landing page of the redirector, and then
enter that address in the web browser on your smartphone.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
273
Web
It takes a long time for a web page to load
If it is taking longer than usual to load web pages, you may have
traveled from a BroadbandAccess service area to a NationalAccess
service area. Although NationalAccess data service is considered a
high-speed data service, it seems slow if you are used to
BroadbandAccess speed.
0
1. Press Phone
BroadbandAccess
Phone application.
2. If you see the BroadbandAccess
and look for either the NationalAccess
or
icon in the title bar of the Main View of the
icon, then there may be a
problem with the web site you are trying to access. Try opening a
different web page to see if the problem persists.
3. If you see the NationalAccess
icon, then you may be
experiencing the difference in performance between the two types
of data networks.
4. To be sure there is not a problem with your connection to the
Verizon Wireless network, press and hold Power/End
to turn
off your phone. Then press and hold the same button to turn it
back on again.
5. Try opening the web page again to see if it loads faster.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
274
Web
An image or map is too small on my screen
The web browser has two modes: Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized
Mode resizes all images and page elements to fit in a single column on
the smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page Mode to see the full-size
image (see Viewing a web page).
You may also be able to save the image on your smartphone or an
expansion card and then view the image later on your computer.
A secure site refuses to permit a transaction
Some websites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. Please
contact the site’s webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions
using your smartphone’s Blazer web browser.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
275
Camera
Camera
Tip
If your smartphone
does not have a built-
in camera, the
information in this
section about taking
pictures does not
apply to you.
Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera:
•
•
Clean the camera’s lens with a soft, lint-free cloth.
Take pictures in bright lighting conditions. Low-light images may be
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the camera.
•
Hold the smartphone as still as possible. Try supporting your
picture-taking arm against your body or a stationary object (such as
a wall).
•
•
Keep the subject of the picture still. Exposure time is longer with
lower light levels, so you may see a blur.
For best results, verify that you have the brightest light source
coming from behind you, lighting the subject’s face. Avoid taking
indoor pictures with the subject in front of a window or light.
•
Make sure the subject is at least 18 inches away from the camera to
ensure good focus.
Remember that when you synchronize your smartphone with your
computer, your camera images are stored in the My Pictures/Palm
Photos folder on your hard drive (see Viewing pictures and videos on
your computer).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
276
Making room on your Treo smartphone
Keep in mind that your smartphone includes an expansion card slot,
and that you can store applications and information on expansion cards
(sold separately). However, you still need free memory on the
smartphone itself to run applications from an expansion card. For more
info on using expansion cards, see Using expansion cards.
If you store a large number of records or install many third-party
applications, the internal memory on your smartphone may fill up. Here
are some common ways to clear space:
•
•
Email: Messages that have large attachments can quickly consume
memory on your smartphone. Delete messages with large
attachments. If you have hundreds of messages with or without
attachments, you may want to delete older messages to make room
(see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application on the Palm
Software Installation CD or the Wireless Sync documentation at
Pics&Videos: Large images take up a lot of memory. Move images to
an expansion card or synchronize them to your computer, and then
delete the images from your smartphone (see Viewing pictures and
videos on your computer).
•
•
Music: Music files often consume excessive memory. Move music
files to an expansion card, or delete large files from your
smartphone.
Messaging: Multimedia content can also consume excessive
memory. Move multimedia content to an expansion card, or delete
large files from your smartphone (see Deleting messages).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
277
Third-party applications
•
•
Internet: If you set a large web browser cache, you may want to use
the web browser’s advanced Memory Management settings to clear
all recent pages (see Customizing your web browser settings).
Third-party applications: You can delete infrequently used
applications (see Removing applications) or move them to an
expansion card (see Copying applications between an expansion
card and your smartphone).
Third-party applications
Tip
Remember that not all
third-party
applications were
written with the Treo
keyboard and 5-way
navigator in mind. You
may encounter
Some third-party applications can cause conflicts on your smartphone.
Third-party applications that modify wireless features may require extra
troubleshooting. If you recently installed an application and your device
seems to be stuck, try the following:
0
1. Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset).
strange behavior or
errors in these
applications if you use
the keyboard and
5-way navigator.
2. If the problem persists, perform a system reset (see Performing a
system reset).
3. Delete the most recently installed application from your
smartphone (see Removing applications).
4. If the problem persists, perform another system reset.
5. If possible, synchronize your smartphone with your computer to
back up your most recent info.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
278
Third-party applications
6. If you’re unable to perform the preceding steps or the problem
persists, locate your Backup subfolder on your computer and
rename the folder (for example, BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in
the following locations might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,”
based on the device you’re upgrading from:
•
•
Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\device name
Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\device name
7. Perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset).
8. Sync to restore your Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and
Pics& Videos info.
9. If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party
applications one at a time by double-clicking a single file in the
original Backup subfolder that you renamed, and sync after each
application you install.
10. If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and
report the problem to its developer.
Getting more help
Contact the author or vendor of the third-party software if you require
further assistance.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
279
Error messages
Error messages
Your Treo smartphone is designed to minimize interruptions when a
system error occurs. If your smartphone encounters a system error, it
automatically resets itself and resumes functioning as normal. If
possible, it even turns the phone back on if it was on before the error
occurred.
Sometimes you might want to know more about an error. Your Treo
smartphone uses a special interface to show error messages in greater
detail.
0
1. Press Phone
.
2. Enter # #377, and then press Send
.
*
3. Review the screen with details about the conditions that led up to
the most recent automatic reset.
4. Select OK.
Note that third-party developers create their own error messages. If you
do not understand an error message, please contact the developer of
the application for help.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
280
Where to learn more
For a quick introduction
•
Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you to many of your Treo™
700P smartphone’s features. It is already installed on your
smartphone, and you can open it any time. Go to Applications
,
and then select Quick Tour
.
While using your Treo smartphone
•
On-device User Guide: A copy of this guide is included right on your
smartphone. The on-device guide is specially formatted for your
smartphone screen. To view the on-device guide, go to
Applications
, and then select My Treo
.
•
Tips: Many of the built-in applications include helpful tips for getting
the most out of your smartphone. To view these tips, open an
application, open the menus
, select Options, and then
select Tips.
•
•
Information: Many screens have a Tips icon in the upper-right
corner. Select the Tips icon to learn about the tasks you can perform
in that dialog box.
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date downloads,
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
281
If you need more information
If you need more information
•
•
•
Books: Many books on Palm OS® devices are available in local or
www.palm.com/mytreo700pVerizon.
Online forums: Consult online Treo device user discussion groups to
swap information and learn about topics you may find nowhere
Customer service from Verizon Wireless: For questions about your
mobile account or features, contact Verizon Wireless technical
support at 866-788-9387 or Verizon Wireless customer service and
billing at 800-256-4646.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
282
Glossary
Glossary
1xRTT (single carrier [1x] radio transmission technology)
A wireless technology that provides fast data transfer and Internet
access with average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts of up to
144Kbps. Also called NationalAccess for Verizon Wireless customers.
Alt (alternative) A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the keyboard,
and then press Alt to access variations such as international
characters and symbols.
Applications
The screen on your Treo™ 700P smartphone from
which you can open all applications.
Auto-off interval The time of inactivity that passes before the screen
on your smartphone turns off. The wireless features on your
smartphone are unaffected by this setting.
Beam The process of sending or receiving an entry or application
using the infrared port on your Treo smartphone.
Bluetooth® wireless technology Technology that enables devices
such as smartphones, mobile phones, and computers to connect
wirelessly to each other so that they can exchange information over
short distances.
BroadbandAccess The name Verizon Wireless has given to a
wireless broadband technology that is designed for very high speed
data transfer with average download speeds of 400 to 700Kbps. It is
capable of reaching download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and upload
speeds of up to 156Kbps. Also called EVDO.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
283
Glossary
BroadBandAccess Connect The name Verizon Wireless has given
to a wireless technology that enables you to convert your smartphone
into a wireless modem so that you can access the Internet from your
computer. Also called dial-up networking.
Device name The name associated with your Treo smartphone that
distinguishes it from other Palm OS® devices. When you first
synchronize your smartphone, you are asked to give it a device name.
This name appears in the User list in Palm Desktop software.
Dialog box A set of options and command buttons that is enclosed
by a border and that enables you to carry out a specific task.
EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized) A wireless broadband
technology that is designed for very high speed data transfer with
average download speeds of 400 to 700Kbps. It is capable of reaching
download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and upload speeds of up to
156Kbps. Also called BroadbandAccess for Verizon Wireless customers.
Favorite A button that provides quick access to a phone number
(speed dial) or commonly used application (such as Contacts, Web,
Messaging). You can define up to 70 favorite buttons in the Phone
application.
®
HotSync
The PalmSource technology that synchronizes your Treo
smartphone and your computer with the simple press of a button.
HotSync manager The computer application that manages the
synchronization of your Treo smartphone with your computer.
Infrared (IR) A way of transmitting information using light waves.
The IR port on your Treo smartphone enables you to transfer
information to other IR devices within a short radius.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
284
Glossary
Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) The rechargeable battery technology used in
Treo smartphones.
MMS (Multimedia Messaging System) An enhanced form of
messaging that enables you to send pictures, videos, animations,
sounds, and ringtones almost instantly.
NationalAccess The name Verizon Wireless has given to a wireless
technology that provides fast data transfer and Internet access with
average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts of up to 144Kbps. Also
called 1xRTT.
Option key
The keyboard button that enables you to access the
alternative feature that appears above the letter on each key.
®
Palm Desktop software A PIM application for computers that
helps you manage your personal information and keep your personal
information synchronized with your Treo smartphone.
Palm OS® The operating system of your Treo 700P smartphone. Palm
OS is known for its simplicity of use and for the large number of
compatible third-party applications that can be added to your Treo 700P
smartphone.
™
Palm Quick Install The component on your Windows computer
that enables you to install Palm OS applications and other information
on your Treo smartphone.
Partnership Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your smartphone
and a hands-free device—that can connect because each device finds
the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a partnership
with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that
device. Partnership is also know as paired relationship, pairing, Trusted
Device, and Trusted Pair on some devices.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
285
Glossary
Phone
The application on your Treo smartphone that enables
you to make and receive phone calls.
PIM (personal information manager) A genre of software that
includes applications such as Palm Desktop software, Microsoft
Outlook, Lotus Notes, and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts,
schedules, tasks, and memos.
Pix Place The companion website for Verizon Wireless picture and
video messaging services.
Slide A collection of text, pictures, videos, and sounds that are
grouped together within a multimedia message. During playback, all
the items within a particular slide appear on the same screen. If a
multimedia message contains multiple slides, each slide can be viewed
separately during playback.
SMS (Short Messaging Service) The service that exchanges short
text messages almost instantly. Text messages are typically exchanged
between mobile phones. These messages can usually include up to 160
characters; messages with more than 160 characters are automatically
split into several messages. Treo smartphones can send and receive
SMS messages while you are on a voice call.
Streaming Technology that enables you to access media content—
for example, watch video or listen to an audio program—directly from
the Internet on your smartphone without needing to download a file to
save on your smartphone.
User folder The folder on your computer that contains the
information you enter in Palm Desktop software and the information
you enter on your smartphone and synchronize with Palm Desktop
software.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
286
Regulatory information
FCC Notice
2. An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users
body and the unit.
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct
contact with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket).
Such use will likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits See
www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure
safety.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless
Smartphones
The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of
RF energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset.
The SAR value of a smartphone is the result of an extensive
testing, measuring and calculation process. It does not represent
how much RF the smartphone emits. All smartphone models are
tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when
in operation, the SAR of a smartphone can be substantially less
than the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of
factors including its proximity to a base station antenna,
smartphone design and other factors. What is important to
remember is that each smartphone meets strict federal
guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a variation in
safety.
All smartphones must meet the federal standard, which
incorporates a substantial margin of safety. As stated above,
variations in SAR values between different model smartphones
do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the
federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the
public.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna
modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may
violate FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF Safety Statement
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines,
users MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn
accessories.
™
1. A Palm brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for
SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
287
Regulatory information
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Treo™ 700P
smartphone, by Palm are:
of waves are the distances covered by one cycle of the wave and
the number of waves that pass a certain point during a set time
period. The wavelength is the distance covered by one cycle of a
wave. The frequency is the number of waves passing a given
point in one second. For any electromagnetic wave, the
wavelength multiplied by the frequency equals the speed of light.
The frequency of an RF signal is usually expressed in units called
hertz (Hz). One Hz equals one wave per second. One kilohertz
(kHz) equals one thousand waves per second, one megahertz
(MHz) equals one million waves per second, and one gigahertz
(GHz) equals one billion waves per second.
Maximum SAR Values
BroadbandAcc
ess Cellular
BroadbandA
ccess PCS
Held to Ear
1.48 (W/Kg)
1.13 (W/Kg)
Body - Worn
0.896 (W/Kg)
0.589 (W/Kg)
RF energy includes waves with frequencies ranging from about
3000 waves per second (3 kHz) to 300 billion waves per second
(300 GHz). Microwaves are a subset of radio waves that have
frequencies ranging from around 300 million waves per second
(300 MHz) to three billion waves per second (3 GHz).
FCC Radiofrequency Emission
This smartphone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission
Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as.
FCC ID number: O8FJIMI.
More information on the smartphone's SAR can be found from
the following FCC Website:
How is radiofrequency energy used? Probably the most
important use of RF energy is for telecommunications. Radio and
TV broadcasting, wireless smartphones, pagers, cordless
smartphones, police and fire department radios, point-to-point
links and satellite communications all rely on RF energy.
Other uses of RF energy include microwave ovens, radar,
industrial heaters and sealers, and medical treatments. RF
energy, especially at microwave frequencies, can heat water.
Since most food has a high water content, microwaves can cook
food quickly. Radar relies on RF energy to track cars and airplanes
as well as for military applications. Industrial heaters and sealers
use RF energy to mold plastic materials, glue wood products,
seal leather items such as shoes and pocketbooks, and process
food. Medical uses of RF energy include pacemaker monitoring
and programming.
(The following information comes from a consumer
information Website jointly sponsored by the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration (FDA) and the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC), entitled “Cell Smartphone Facts: Consumer
Information on Wireless Smartphones.” The information
reproduced herein is dated July 29, 2003. For further updates,
please visit the Website:
What is radiofrequency energy (RF)? Radiofrequency
energy (RF) is another name for radio waves. It is one form of
electromagnetic energy that makes up the electromagnetic
spectrum. Some of the other forms of energy in the
electromagnetic spectrum are gamma rays, x-rays and light.
Electromagnetic energy (or electromagnetic radiation) consists of
waves of electric and magnetic energy moving together
(radiating) through space. The area where these waves are found
is called an electromagnetic field.
Radio waves are created due to the movement of electrical
charges in antennas. As they are created, these waves radiate
away from the antenna. All electromagnetic waves travel at the
speed of light. The major differences between the different types
How is radiofrequency radiation measured? RF waves and
RF fields have both electrical and magnetic components. It is
often convenient to express the strength of the RF field in terms
of each component. For example, the unit “volts per meter” (V/
m) is used to measure the electric field strength, and the unit
“amperes per meter” (A/m) is used to express the magnetic field
strength. Another common way to characterize an RF field is by
means of the power density. Power density is defined as power
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
288
Regulatory information
per unit area. For example, power density can be expressed in
terms of milliwatts (one thousandth of a watt) per square
centimeter (mW/cm2) or microwatts (one millionth of a watt) per
square centimeter (µW/cm2).
people. In the meantime, standards-setting organizations and
government agencies are continuing to monitor the latest
scientific findings to determine whether changes in safety limits
are needed to protect human health.
The quantity used to measure how much RF energy is actually
absorbed by the body is called the Specific Absorption Rate or
SAR. The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF
energy. It is usually expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/
kg) or milliwatts per gram (mW/g).
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for
public health and safety have worked together and in connection
with WHO to monitor developments and identify research needs
related to RF biological effects.
What levels of RF energy are considered safe? Various
organizations and countries have developed standards for
exposure to radiofrequency energy. These standards
What biological effects can be caused by RF energy?
The biological effects of radiofrequency energy should not be
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in
X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization
is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal
locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage
biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material. Ionization
only occurs with very high levels of electromagnetic energy such
as X-rays and gamma rays. Often the term radiation is used when
discussing ionizing radiation (such as that associated with
nuclear power plants).
The energy levels associated with radiofrequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause the ionization of atoms and molecules.
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other
types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared
radiation (heat) and other forms of electromagnetic radiation
with relatively low frequencies.
Large amounts of RF energy can heat tissue. This can damage
tissues and increase body temperatures. Two areas of the body,
the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating
because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away
excess heat.
recommend safe levels of exposure for both the general public
and for workers. In the United States, the FCC has used safety
guidelines for RF environmental exposure since 1985.
The FCC guidelines for human exposure to RF electromagnetic
fields are derived from the recommendations of two expert
organizations, the National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the
recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering
experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after
extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the
biological effects of RF energy.
Many countries in Europe and elsewhere use exposure
guidelines developed by the International Commission on Non-
Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). The ICNIRP safety limits
are generally similar to those of the NCRP and IEEE, with a few
exceptions. For example, ICNIRP recommends different exposure
levels in the lower and upper frequency ranges and for localized
exposure from certain products such as hand-held wireless
telephones. Currently, the World Health Organization is working
to provide a framework for international harmonization of RF
safety standards.
The NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP all have identified a whole-body
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) value of 4 watts per kilogram (4
W/kg) as a threshold level of exposure at which harmful
biological effects may occur. Exposure guidelines in terms of field
strength, power density and localized SAR were then derived
from this threshold value. In addition, the NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP
guidelines vary depending on the frequency of the RF exposure.
The amount of RF radiation routinely encountered by the
general public is too low to produce significant heating or
increased body temperature. Still, some people have questions
about the possible health effects of low levels of RF energy. It is
generally agreed that further research is needed to determine
what effects actually occur and whether they are dangerous to
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
289
Regulatory information
This is due to the finding that whole-body human absorption of
RF energy varies with the frequency of the RF signal. The most
restrictive limits on whole-body exposure are in the frequency
range of 30-300 MHz where the human body absorbs RF energy
most efficiently. For products that only expose part of the body,
such as wireless smartphones, exposure limits in terms of SAR
only are specified.
compliance when they submit an application to the FCC for
construction or modification of a transmitting facility or renewal
of a license. Failure to comply with the FCC's RF exposure
guidelines could lead to the preparation of a formal
Environmental Assessment, possible Environmental Impact
Statement and eventual rejection of an application. Technical
guidelines for evaluating compliance with the FCC.
The exposure limits used by the FCC are expressed in terms of
SAR, electric and magnetic field strength, and power density for
transmitters operating at frequencies from 300 kHz to 100 GHz.
The specific values can be found in two FCC bulletins, OET
Bulletins 56 and 65: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/
RF safety requirements can be found in the FCC's OET Bulletin
Low-powered, intermittent, or inaccessible RF transmitters and
facilities are normally excluded from the requirement for routine
evaluation for RF exposure. These exclusions are based on
standard calculations and measurement data indicating that a
transmitting station or equipment operating under the conditions
prescribed is unlikely to cause exposures in excess of the
guidelines under normal conditions of use. Such exclusions are
not exclusions from compliance, but, rather, exclusions from
routine evaluation. The FCC's policies on RF exposure and
categorical exclusion can be found in Section 1.1307(b) of the
FCC's Rules and Regulations [(47 CFR 1.1307(b)].
Why has the FCC adopted guidelines for RF exposure?
The FCC authorizes and licenses products, transmitters, and
facilities that generate RF and microwave radiation. It has
jurisdiction over all transmitting services in the U.S. except those
specifically operated by the Federal Government. While the FCC
does not have the expertise to determine radiation exposure
guidelines on its own, it does have the expertise and authority to
recognize and adopt technically sound standards promulgated by
other expert agencies and organizations, and has done so. (Our
joint efforts with the FDA in developing this website is illustrative
of the kind of inter-agency efforts and consultation we engage in
regarding this health and safety issue.)
Under the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA),
the FCC has certain responsibilities to consider whether its
actions will significantly affect the quality of the human
environment. Therefore, FCC approval and licensing of
transmitters and facilities must be evaluated for significant
impact on the environment. Human exposure to RF radiation
emitted by FCC-regulated transmitters is one of several factors
that must be considered in such environmental evaluations. In
1996, the FCC revised its guidelines for RF exposure as a result of
a multi-year proceeding and as required by the
How can I obtain the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
value for my wireless smartphone? The FCC requires that
wireless smartphones sold in the United States demonstrate
compliance with human exposure limits adopted by the FCC in
1996. The relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a
wireless telephone-user is given by the Specific Absorption Rate
(SAR), as explained above. The FCC requires wireless
smartphones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per
kilogram (1.6 W/kg) in terms of SAR.
Information on SAR for a specific smartphone model can be
obtained for many recently manufactured smartphones using the
FCC identification (ID) number for that model. The FCC ID
number is usually printed somewhere on the case of the
smartphone. Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the
battery pack to find the number. Once you have the ID number,
page, you will see instructions for entering the FCC ID number.
Type the FCC ID number exactly as requested (the Grantee Code
is the first three characters, the Equipment Product Code is the
rest of the FCC ID number). Then click on “Start Search.” The
Telecommunications Act of 1996.
Radio and television broadcast stations, satellite-earth stations,
experimental radio stations and certain wireless communication
facilities are required to undergo routine evaluation for RF
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
290
Regulatory information
“Grant of Equipment Authorization” for your telephone should
appear. Read through the grant for the section on “SAR
Compliance,” “Certification of Compliance with FCC Rules for RF
Exposure” or similar language. This section should contain the
value(s) for typical or maximum SAR for your smartphone.
Smartphones and other products authorized since June 2,
2000, should have the maximum SAR levels noted directly on the
“Grant of Equipment Authorization.” For smartphones and
products authorized between about mid-1998 and June 2000,
detailed information on SAR levels is typically found in the
exhibits associated with the grant. Once a grant is accessed, the
exhibits can be viewed by clicking on “View Exhibit.” Grants
authorized prior to 1998 are not part of the electronic database
but, rather, have been documented in the form of paper records.
The FCC database does not list smartphones by model
number. However, consumers may find SAR information from
other sources as well. Some wireless smartphone manufacturers
make SAR information available on their own Web sites. In
addition, some non-government websites provide SARs for
specific models of wireless smartphones. However, the FCC has
not reviewed these sites and makes no guarantees of their
accuracy. Finally, smartphones certified by the Cellular
Do wireless smartphone accessories that claim to
shield the head from RF radiation work? Since there are no
known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless
smartphones, there is no reason to believe that accessories that
claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks.
Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption
use special smartphone cases, while others involve nothing more
than a metallic accessory attached to the smartphone. Studies
have shown that these products generally do not work as
advertised. Unlike “hand-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may
interfere with proper operation of the smartphone. The
smartphone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,
leading to an increase in RF absorption. In February 2002, the
Federal trade Commission (FTC) charged two companies that
sold devices that claimed to protect wireless smartphone
users from radiation with making false and unsubstantiated
claims. According to FTC, these defendants lacked a reasonable
basis to substantiate their claim.
What are wireless telephone base stations? Fixed
antennas used for wireless telecommunications are referred to as
cellular base stations, cell stations, PCS (“Personal
Communications Service”) stations or telephone transmission
towers. These base stations consist of antennas and electronic
equipment. Because the antennas need to be high in the air, they
are often located on towers, poles, water tanks, or rooftops.
Typical heights for freestanding base station towers are 50-
200 feet.
Some base stations use antennas that look like poles, 10 to 15
feet in length, that are referred to as “omni-directional” antennas.
These types of antennas are usually found in rural areas. In urban
and suburban areas, wireless providers now more commonly
use panel or sector antennas for their base stations. These
antennas consist of rectangular panels, about 1 by 4 feet in
dimension. The antennas are usually arranged in three groups
of three antennas each. One antenna in each group is used to
transmit signals to wireless smartphones, and the other two
antennas in each group are used to receive signals from wireless
smartphones.
Telecommunications and Internet Association (CTIA) are required
to provide SAR information to consumers in the instructional
materials that come with the smartphones.
Do hands-free kits for wireless smartphones reduce
risks from exposure to RF emissions? Since there are no
known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless
smartphones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits
reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used with wireless
smartphones for convenience and comfort. These systems
reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the
smartphone, which is the source of the RF emissions, will not be
placed against the head. On the other hand, if the smartphone is
mounted against the waist or other part of the body during use,
then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy. Wireless
smartphones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet safety
requirements regardless of whether they are used against the
head or against the body. Either configuration should result in
compliance with the safety limit.
At any base station site, the amount of RF energy produced
depends on the number of radio channels (transmitters) per
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
291
Regulatory information
antenna and the power of each transmitter. Typically, 21 channels
per antenna sector are available. For a typical cell site using
sector antennas, each of the three transmitting antennas could be
connected to up to 21 transmitters for a total of 63 transmitters.
However, it is unlikely that all of the transmitters would be
transmitting at the same time. When omni-directional antennas
are used, a cellular base station could theoretically use up to 96
transmitters, but this would be very unusual, and, once again, it
is unlikely that all transmitters would be in operation
simultaneously. Base stations used for PCS communications
generally require fewer transmitters than those used for cellular
radio transmissions, since PCS carriers usually have a higher
density of base station antenna sites.
When cellular and PCS antennas are mounted on rooftops,
RF levels on that roof or on others near by would probably be
greater than those typically encountered on the ground.
However, exposure levels approaching or exceeding safety
guidelines should be encountered only very close to or directly
in front of the antennas. In addition, for sector-type antennas,
typically used for such rooftop base stations, RF levels to the
side and in back of these antennas are insignificant. General
guidelines on antenna installations and circumstances that
might give rise to a concern about a facility's conformance with
FCC regulations can be found in A Local Government Official's
Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF Emission Safety: Rules,
Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be accessed
Are wireless telephone base stations safe? The
electromagnetic RF signals transmitted from base station
antennas stations travel toward the horizon in relatively narrow
paths. For example, the radiation pattern for an antenna array
mounted on a tower can be likened to a thin pancake centered
around the antenna system. The individual pattern for a single
array of sector antennas is wedge-shaped, like a piece of pie. As
with all forms of electromagnetic energy, the power decreases
rapidly as one moves away from the antenna. Therefore, RF
exposure on the ground is much less than exposure very close
to the antenna and in the path of the transmitted radio signal. In
fact, ground-level exposure from such antennas is typically
thousands of times less than the exposure levels recommended
as safe by expert organizations. So exposure to nearby residents
would be well within safety margins.
Cellular and PCS base stations in the United States are
required to comply with limits for exposure recommended by
expert organizations and endorsed by government agencies
responsible for health and safety. Measurements made near
cellular and PCS base station antennas mounted on towers have
confirmed that ground-level exposures are typically thousands of
times less than the exposure limits adopted by the FCC. In fact, in
order to be exposed to levels at or near the FCC limits for cellular
or PCS frequencies an individual would essentially have to
remain in the main transmitted radio signal (at the height of the
antenna) and within a few feet from the antenna. This is, of
course, very unlikely to occur.
Who regulates exposure to radiation from microwave
ovens, television sets and computer monitors? The Food
and Drug Administration is responsible for protecting the public
from harmful radiation emissions from these consumer
products.
Does the FCC routinely monitor radiofrequency
radiation from antennas? The FCC does not have the
resources or the personnel to routinely monitor the emissions
for all the thousands of transmitters that are subject to FCC
jurisdiction. However, the FCC does have measurement
instrumentation for evaluating RF levels in areas that may be
accessible to the public or to workers. If there is evidence for
potential non-compliance with FCC exposure guidelines for a
FCC-regulated facility, staff from the FCC's Office of Engineering
and Technology or the FCC Enforcement Bureau can conduct an
investigation, and, if appropriate, perform actual measurements.
Circumstances that could give rise to a concern about a facility's
conformance with FCC regulations can be found in A Local
Government Official's Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF
Emission Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance.
Potential exposure problems should be brought to the FCC's
attention by contacting the FCC RF Safety Program at: 202-418-
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
292
Regulatory information
Does the FCC maintain a database that includes
information on the location and technical parameters of
all the transmitting towers it regulates? Each of the FCC
Bureaus maintains its own licensing database system for the
service(s) it regulates (e.g., television, cellular service, satellite
earth stations.) The FCC issues two types of licenses: site specific
and market based. In the case of site specific licensed facilities,
technical operating information is collected from the licensee as
part of the licensing process. However, in the case of market
based licensing (e.g., PCS, cellular), the licensee is granted the
authority to operate a radio communications system in a
geographic area using as many facilities as are required, and the
licensee is not required to provide the FCC with specific location
and operating parameters of these facilities.
the FCC's Wireless Telecommunications Bureau at
Do wireless smartphones pose a health hazard? The
available scientific evidence does not show that any health
problems are associated with using wireless smartphones. There
is no proof, however, that wireless smartphones are absolutely
safe. Wireless smartphones emit low levels of radiofrequency
energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also
emit very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas
high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),
exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects
causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low
level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some
studies have suggested that some biological effects may occur,
but such findings have not been confirmed by additional
research. In some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in
reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons for
inconsistent results.
Information on site specific licensed facilities can be found in
the “General Menu Reports” (GenMen) at http://
The various FCC Bureaus also publish on at least a weekly
basis, bulk extracts of their licensing databases. Each licensing
database has its own unique file structure. These extracts consist
of multiple, very large files. The FCC's Office of Engineering and
/www.fcc.gov/oet/info/database/fadb.html. Entry points into
the various databases include frequency, state/county, latitude/
longitude, call-sign and licensee name. For further information
on the Commission's existing databases, you can contact Donald
Campbell at [email protected] or 202-418-2405.
What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless
smartphones? Under the law, FDA does not review the safety
of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless
smartphones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs
or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take
action if wireless smartphones are shown to emit radiofrequency
energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case,
FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless smartphones to
notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall
the smartphones so that the hazard no longer exists.
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA
regulatory actions, FDA has urged the wireless smartphone
industry to take a number of steps, including the following:
• Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF
of the type emitted by wireless smartphones;
Can local and state governmental bodies establish
limits for RF exposure? Although some local and state
governments have enacted rules and regulations about human
exposure to RF energy in the past, the Telecommunications Act
of 1996 requires the Federal Government to control human
exposure to RF emissions. In particular, Section 704 of the Act
states that, “No State or local government or instrumentality
thereof may regulate the placement, construction, and
modification of personal wireless service facilities on the basis of
the environmental effects of radio frequency emissions to the
extent that such facilities comply with the Commission's
regulations concerning such emissions.” Further information on
federal authority and FCC policy is available in a fact sheet from
• Design wireless smartphones in a way that minimizes any RF
exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function;
and
• Cooperate in providing users of wireless smartphones with the
best possible information on possible effects of wireless
smartphone use on human health
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
293
Regulatory information
FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal
agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety
to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following
agencies belong to this working group:
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Environmental Protection Agency
Federal Communications Commission
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
National Telecommunications and Information Administration
telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower power
levels, and thus produce RF exposures well within the FCC's
compliance limits.
What are the results of the research done already?
The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and
many studies have suffered from flaws in their research methods.
Animal experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency
energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wireless smartphones
have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in
other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have
suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development
of cancer in laboratory animals. However, many of the studies
that showed increased tumor development used animals that
had been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-causing
chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to develop cancer in the
absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the animals to RF
for up to 22 hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the
conditions under which people use wireless smartphones, so we
don't know with certainty what the results of such studies mean
for human health.
Three large epidemiology studies have been published since
December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any
possible association between the use of wireless smartphones
and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic
neuroma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or
other cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the existence of
any harmful health effects from wireless smartphone RF
exposures. However, none of the studies can answer questions
about long-term exposures, since the average period of
smartphone use in these studies was around three years.
The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency
working group activities, as well.
FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless
smartphones with the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC). All smartphones that are sold in the United States must
comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC
relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions
about wireless smartphones.
FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless
smartphone networks rely upon. While these base stations
operate at higher power than do the wireless smartphones
themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base
stations are typically thousands of times lower than those they
can get from wireless smartphones. Base stations are thus not
the primary subject of the safety questions discussed in this
document.
What kinds of smartphones are the subject of this
update? The term “wireless smartphone” refers here to hand-
held wireless smartphones with built-in antennas, often called
“cell,” “mobile,” or “PCS” smartphones. These types of wireless
smartphones can expose the user to measurable radiofrequency
energy (RF) because of the short distance between the
smartphone and the user's head. These RF exposures are limited
by Federal Communications Commission safety guidelines that
were developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health
and safety agencies. When the smartphone is located at greater
distances from the user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower
because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with
What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure
from wireless smartphones poses a health risk?
A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies
of people actually using wireless smartphones would provide
some of the data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure
studies could be completed in a few years. However, very large
numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of
a cancer promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies
can provide data that is directly applicable to human populations,
increasing distance from the source. The so-called “cordless
smartphones,” which have a base unit connected to the
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
294
Regulatory information
but 10 or more years' follow-up may be needed to provide
answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is
because the interval between the time of exposure to a cancer-
causing agent and the time tumors develop - if they do - may be
many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies
is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure
during day-to-day use of wireless smartphones. Many factors
affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the
smartphone is held, or which model of smartphone is used.
energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a
person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a
wireless smartphone will reduce RF exposure.
If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless
smartphone every day, you could place more distance between
your body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level
drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use
a headset and carry the wireless smartphone away from your
body or use a wireless smartphone connected to a remote
antenna.
What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible
health effects of wireless smartphone RF? FDA is working
with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of
investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal
studies are conducted to address important questions about the
effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF).
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless
smartphones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF
exposure from these products, you can use measures like those
described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless
smartphone use.
FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health
Organization International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project
since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has
been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs
that has driven the establishment of new research programs
around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of
public information documents on EMF issues.
What about children using wireless smartphones?
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of
wireless smartphones, including children and teenagers. If you
want to take steps to lower exposure to radiofrequency energy
(RF), the measures described above would apply to children and
teenagers using wireless smartphones. Reducing the time of
wireless smartphone use and increasing the distance between
the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure.
FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet
Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and
Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless
smartphone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight,
obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and
academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted
through contracts to independent investigators. The initial
research will include both laboratory studies and studies of
wireless smartphone users. The CRADA will also include a broad
assessment of additional research needs in the context of the
latest research developments around the world.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using wireless
smartphones at all. For example, the government in the United
Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation
in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that using
a wireless smartphone causes brain tumors or other ill effects.
Their recommendation to limit wireless smartphone use by
children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific
evidence that any health hazard exists.
What about wireless smartphone interference with
medical equipment? Radiofrequency energy (RF) from
wireless smartphones can interact with some electronic devices.
For this reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to
measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac
pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test
method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Association
What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to
radiofrequency energy from my wireless smartphone? If
there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not
know that there is--it is probably very small. But if you are
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a
few simple steps to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
295
Regulatory information
for the Advancement of Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The
final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical device manufacturers,
and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This
standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac
pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless
smartphone EMI.
FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld
wireless smartphones and helped develop a voluntary standard
sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and performance
requirements for hearing aids and wireless smartphones so that
no interference occurs when a person uses a “compatible”
smartphone and a “compatible” hearing aid at the same time.
This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000.
agencies with respect to the safety of RF-emitting products used
by the public, such as cellular and PCS smartphones.
The FDA's microwave oven standard is an emission standard
(as opposed to an exposure standard) that allows specific levels
of microwave leakage (measured at five centimeters from the
oven surface). The standard also requires ovens to have two
independent interlock systems that prevent the oven from
generating microwaves the moment that the latch is released or
the door of the oven is opened. The FDA has stated that ovens
that meet its standards and are used according to the
manufacturer's recommendations are safe for consumer and
industrial use. More information is available from:
The EPA has, in the past, considered developing federal
guidelines for public exposure to RF radiation. However, EPA
activities related to RF safety and health are presently limited to
advisory functions. For example, the EPA now chairs an Inter-
agency Radiofrequency Working Group, which coordinates RF
health-related activities among the various federal agencies with
health or regulatory responsibilities in this area.
OSHA is responsible for protecting workers from exposure to
hazardous chemical and physical agents. In 1971, OSHA issued a
protection guide for exposure of workers to RF radiation [29 CFR
1910.97]. However, this guide was later ruled to be only advisory
and not mandatory. Moreover, it was based on an earlier RF
exposure standard that has now been revised. At the present
time, OSHA uses the IEEE and/or FCC exposure guidelines for
enforcement purposes under OSHA's “general duty clause” (for
more information see:
FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless smartphones for
possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful
interference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess
the interference and work to resolve the problem.
Which other federal agencies have responsibilities
related to potential RF health effects? Certain agencies in
the Federal Government have been involved in monitoring,
researching or regulating issues related to human exposure to
RF radiation. These agencies include the Food and Drug
Administration (FDA), the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA), the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
(NIOSH), the National Telecommunications and Information
Administration (NTIA) and the Department of Defense (DOD).
By authority of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act
of 1968, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of
the FDA develops performance standards for the emission of
radiation from electronic products including X-ray equipment,
other medical devices, television sets, microwave ovens, laser
products and sunlamps. The CDRH established a product
performance standard for microwave ovens in 1971 limiting the
amount of RF leakage from ovens. However, the CDRH has not
adopted performance standards for other RF-emitting products.
The FDA is, however, the lead federal health agency in
NIOSH is part of the U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services. It conducts research and investigations into issues
related to occupational exposure to chemical and physical
agents. NIOSH has, in the past, undertaken to develop RF
exposure guidelines for workers, but final guidelines were never
adopted by the agency. NIOSH conducts safety-related RF studies
through its Physical Agents Effects Branch in Cincinnati, Ohio.
The NTIA is an agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce
and is responsible for authorizing Federal Government use of the
RF electromagnetic spectrum. Like the FCC, the NTIA also has
monitoring the latest research developments and advising other
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
296
Regulatory information
NEPA responsibilities and has considered adopting guidelines for
evaluating RF exposure from U.S. Government transmitters such
as radar and military facilities.
The Department of Defense (DOD) has conducted research on
the biological effects of RF energy for a number of years. This
research is now conducted primarily at the U.S. Air Force
Research Laboratory located at Brooks Air Force Base, Texas. The
DOD Web site for RF biological effects information is listed with
other sites in conjunction with a question on other sources of
information, below.
The manufacturer of a cell smartphone that does not meet FCC's
regulatory requirements may be required to remove the cell
smartphone from use and to refund the purchase price or provide
a replacement smartphone, and may be subject to civil or
criminal penalties. In addition, if the cell smartphone presents a
risk of injury to the user, FDA may also take regulatory action.
The most important post-grant test, from a consumer's
perspective, is testing of the RF emissions of the smartphone.
FCC measures the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of the
smartphone, following a very rigorous testing protocol. As is true
for nearly any scientific measurement, there is a possibility that
the test measurement may be less than or greater than the actual
RF emitted by the smartphone. This difference between the RF
test measurement and actual RF emission is because test
measurements are limited by instrument accuracy, because test
measurement and actual use environments are different, and
other variable factors. This inherent variability is known as
“measurement uncertainty.” When FCC conducts post-grant
testing of a cell smartphone, FCC takes into account any
measurement uncertainty to when determining whether
regulatory action is appropriate. This approach ensures that
when FCC takes regulatory action, it will have a sound, defensible
scientific basis.
FDA scientific staff reviewed the methodology used by FCC to
measure cell smartphone RF, and agreed it is an acceptable
approach, given our current understanding of the risks presented
by cellular smartphone RF emissions. RF emissions from cellular
smartphones have not been shown to present a risk of injury to
the user when the measured SAR is less than the safety limits set
by FCC (an SAR of 1.6 w/kg). Even in a case where the maximum
measurement uncertainty permitted by current measurement
standards was added to the maximum permissible SAR, the
resulting SAR value would be well below any level known to
produce an acute effect. Consequently, FCC's approach with
measurement uncertainty will not result in consumers being
exposed to any known risk from the RF emitted by cellular
telephones.
Who funds and carries out research on the biological
effects of RF energy? Research into possible biological effects
of RF energy is carried out in laboratories in the United States
and around the world. In the U.S., most research has been
funded by the Department of Defense, due to the extensive
military use of RF equipment such as radar and high-powered
radio transmitters. In addition, some federal agencies
responsible for health and safety, such as the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration (FDA), have sponsored and conducted research in
this area. At the present time, most of the non-military research
on biological effects of RF energy in the U.S. is being funded by
industry organizations. More research is being carried out
overseas, particularly in Europe.
In 1996, the World Health Organization (WHO) established the
International EMF Project to review the scientific literature and
work towards resolution of health concerns over the use of RF
technology. WHO maintains a Web site that provides extensive
information on this project and about RF biological effects and
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for
public health and safety have worked together and in connection
with WHO to monitor developments and identify research needs
related to RF biological effects.
How does FCC Audit Cell Smartphone RF? After FCC
grants permission for a particular cellular telephone to be
marketed, FCC will occasionally conduct “post-grant” testing to
determine whether production versions of the smartphone are
being produced to conform with FCC regulatory requirements.
FDA will continue to monitor studies and literature reports
concerning acute effects of cell smartphone RF, and concerning
chronic effects of long-term exposure to cellular telephone RF
(that is, the risks from using a cell smartphone for many years).
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
297
Regulatory information
If new information leads FDA to believe that a change to FCC's
measurement policy may be appropriate, FDA will contact FCC
and both agencies will work together to develop a mutually-
acceptable approach.
precaution before connecting your smartphone to your
computer, placing the smartphone in a cradle, or connecting it to
any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the
following:
• Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by
simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case
should discharge the ESD on your body.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Your Treo is compliant with
the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) requirements. For
additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this
• Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
• Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm® Device
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic
devices if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to
avoid such an occurrence.
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that
can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the
environment include the following:
Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge
caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a
material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing
more than annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet
while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you
may get a shock—the discharge event—when you touch a metal
doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static
electricity.
• Low relative humidity.
• Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For
example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than
natural fibers like cotton.)
• The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect
electronic devices.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to
discharge static electricity, if you are in an environment where
you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra precautions
to protect your electronic equipment against ESD.
ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can
harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take
measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your
®
Palm smartphone, from ESD harm. While Palm has built
protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately
exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could
harm your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an
external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to
docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you
carry with you, such as your smartphone, build up ESD in a
unique way because the static electricity that may have built up
on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when
the device is connected to another device such as a docking
station, a discharge event can occur.
Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up
static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before
touching an electronic device or connecting one device to
another. The recommendation from Palm is that you take this
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
298
Specifications
Radio
• CDMA 800MHz (digital cellular), 1900MHz (PCS), and 1400MHz (GPS)
• EVDO and 1xRTT
Phone
features
• Speakerphone
• Hands-free headset jack
(2.5mm, 3 or 4-barrel connector)
• Microphone mute option
• TTY/TDD compatible
• 3-way calling
Processor
technology
• Intel XScale® processor, 312MHz
Expansion
Battery
• SD/MultiMediaCard/SDIO card slot
• Rechargeable lithium ion
• Removable for replacement
• 3.5 hours full charge time
Palm OS®
version
• Palm OS 5.4.9
Camera
• Still image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel
• 2x digital zoom
• Video capture resolution (352 x 288)
• Automatic light balance
(camera
version only)
Size
• 5.08 in. x 2.28 in. x 0.89 in. (129mm x 58mm x 22.5mm) with antenna
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
299
Weight
• 6.4 ounces (180 grams)
Connectivity
• IR
• Bluetooth® wireless technology (1.2 compliant)
Display
• Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)
• 65,536 colors (16-bit color)
• User-adjustable brightness
Keyboard
• Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator
• Backlight for low lighting conditions
Included
software
• Phone (including Palm OS
Favorites, Dial Pad)
• Pics&Videos (includes camera and
camcorder)
• Contacts
• Memos
• Tasks
• Voice Memo
• Messaging (text and multimedia)
• Web browser (Internet)
• Pocket Tunes
• Documents-To-Go®
• Calculator Basic and Advanced
• World Clock
• Wireless Sync
• Palm® Desktop software and
HotSync® manager
• Calendar
System
requirements
• Windows 2000 or XP with USB port
• Mac OS 10.2 –10.3 with USB port
• Later versions may also be supported
Operating and
storage
• 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
• 5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)
temperature
range
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
300
Index
Index
101
SYMBOLS
Internet providers and 86
voicemail and 47
! in Tasks list 179
NUMERICS
1xRTT (single carrier) radio
transmission technology
283
activating
items on screen 26
smartphone device 12
Active Call View screen 49,
51, 53
active calls. See phone calls
ActiveSync 214
Add Bookmark command
116
Dial Pad 40, 50, 74
email 84, 127, 245
Favorites pages 43
files 183, 245
24-hour clock 225
3G2 files 146, 152
3GP files 146
3GPP2 formats 152
5-way navigator 5, 24, 25,
234
HotSync Manager 210
information 237
itemsonexpansion cards
217
items on pick lists 29
Palm online support 281
Pocket Tunes 153
Quick Tour 281
secure websites 121, 275
web browser 34, 114
web pages 113, 116, 273
World Clock 189
911 calls 76, 81, 235
911 Only option 77
Add Call button 50, 53
Add Contact command 52
Add Favorites dialog box 60
Add New Number prompt 52
Add Song button 161
Add to album command 150
adding
A
AC charger 7
accented characters 31, 32
Access Powered devices
201, 261, 282
accessing
accessories 5, 215
Alert screen 83
accessories 5, 215, 291
accounts
additional security 241
Bluetooth devices 65–66,
135
alternate characters 31
application menus 28
applications 34, 35, 51
calculator 187
conference calls and 55
corporate mail servers
and 89, 91, 127, 245
forwarding calls and 57
bookmarks 116
business cards 166
caller ID photos 72, 165
Call Log 45
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
301
Index
captions to photos 139,
140, 150
multimedia messages
and 101
104
albums. See photo albums;
video albums
categories for
applications 228
cities to World Clock 190
contacts 164
emoticons 99
events 168, 170
viewing website 124
adjusting screen brightness
adjusting volume
alarm tones 176
music 160
phone calls 13, 71, 266
ringer 72
video clips 142
voice memos 186
Advanced Mode (calculator)
187, 188
alert icon 81
alerts
expansion cards 215
favorite buttons 59–61
hands-free devices 67, 68
memos 182
multiple recipients 61, 97
partnerships 66, 131, 133
passwords 237, 239
phone numbers 52
pictures to albums 150
playlists 161, 162
private entries 239
QuickText phrases 98, 99
tasks 177, 178
See also alarms
clearing 83
displaying 83
including messagetextin
109
responding to 48, 103
aligning the screen 226
Alt key 31, 283
Advanced Mode command
187
alternate characters 31, 32
anniversaries 171
Answer button 46
answering phone calls 46, 49
antenna 4, 287
agenda lists 167
Agenda View 74, 167, 174
Alarm check box 169
alarm clock 190
Alarm Sound pick list 176,
181
TTY/TDD devices 78
videos to albums 150
voice memos 185
wallpaper 150
applets 121
application buttons 33
application categories 35
application list view 229
Application pick list 222
application preferences 229,
231
Address Bar pick list 114
addresses
alarm tones 176
alarms
adding multiple
See also alerts
recipients to 61, 97
assigning to favorite
buttons 61
adding to calendar 169,
176
applications
adding to tasks 178, 181
highlighting email 26
See also specific built-in
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
302
Index
applications
for 22
video clips as 142, 148
accessing 34, 35
assigning to Quick Keys
61
voice memos as 186
audio 221
202, 218
viewing information
associating with buttons
See also multimedia
61, 230
viewing menus for 28
defined 283
beaming 202
categorizing 228
caution for 218, 247
changing screen fonts for
224
Audio Caption command
139
closing 33
copying 218
copying text to 123
customizing 228–229
deleting 17, 195, 278
disabling
displayingapplicationsin
228, 229
opening applications and
33, 217
overview 34–35
adding 139, 140, 150
background music and
147
playing 145
Audio icon 145
appointments 167, 263
See also events
Auto answer pick list 68
Auto Lock Device box 237
Auto naming pick list 144
Auto-complete check box
125
synchronization for 204
downloading 121, 194
finding text in 191
getting help with 194
installing 192–194, 247,
285
Archive folder 195
area conversions 188
arrow icons 24
ASF files 146
Auto-hide Toolbar option
147
Attach image option 102
Attach ringtone option 102
Attach voice memo option
102
Auto-Keyguard pick list 233
automated voicemail
systems 47
automatic shut-off 244, 283
automating tasks 59
Auto-off After pick list 244
auto-off interval 283
AVI files 146
managing 183
opening 5, 33, 34, 51, 217
playing music and 161
running on expansion
cards 277
attachments
multimedia messages
and 102
pictures as 138, 140, 148
storing large 277
supported formats for
183
sending over Bluetooth
connections 199
setting default 231
switching 51
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
303
Index
201
B
with 131
203
Background check box 174
background music 147
backgrounds 74, 174
backing up information 16,
22, 251
incoming calls and 49
from 200
receiving phone calls and
67, 267
beaming
backlight (keyboard) 30, 223,
battery life and 11
overview 201–203
troubleshooting 201, 203
turning off 244
244
backlight icon 223
Backspace key 30
Backup folder 196
backup folders 195, 246, 247,
259, 279
over 199
sendinginformationover
198
bell 83, 255
billing statements 58
birthdays 171
setting up 65–66
Basic Mode (calculator) 187
Basic Mode command 187
basics 281
synchronizing from 208,
210, 258
blank screens 254
blank text messages 97
blank time slots 174
Blazer web browser 114, 275
See also web browser
blinking bell 83, 255
Bluetooth application
opening 65
troubleshooting 268, 269
Bluetooth icon 65
Bluetooth icons (Phone) 82
BMP files 145
battery
charging 8–10
displaying remaining
power on 80
bonus software. See built-in
applications
disposing 252
installing 7
Bookmark Page icon 120
bookmark pages 119
bookmarks 116–120, 201
Bookmarks View 118, 119
Bookmarks View icon 118
border glow (highlight) 26
brightness (screen) 11, 223,
244, 254
maximizing life of 11, 38,
244
sending from 198, 199
setting trusted pairs in
131
replacing 7, 252
viewing status of 10
battery consumption 11
battery door release 6
battery icons 10, 82
Beam Business Card
command 166
setting up connections
with 134, 136, 208
visibility options in 200
Bluetooth devices
connecting to 65, 133–
137, 208
brightness duration
(backlight) 223, 244
Brightness slider 244
Beam Category command
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
304
Index
BroadbandAccess Connect
service 80, 127, 130
BroadbandAccess
connections
for 230
overview 167
Buttons Preferences screen
230
setting alarms from 169
173–175
setting up 129
C
troubleshooting 272
viewing status of 81
BroadbandAccess icon 114
BroadbandAccess
technology 283
browsing files 217
browsing the web. See web
browsing
synchronizing
cache 126, 278
calculator 31, 187
Calendar button 5, 33, 34,
167
call lists. See Call Log screen
Call Log button 45
Call Log screen 45, 52
call waiting 54
Call Waiting dialog box 54
caller IDs 72, 73, 138, 165
calling plans 58
Calculator icon 187
calculator modes 187
calendar
built-in applications 192,
195, 281
See also Calendar
application
See also applications;
specific application
built-in camera. See camera
built-in passkeys 66
built-in security software 232
Business Card command
166
customizing 173–175
deleting events from 173
displaying 167
calls. See phone calls
camcorder 138, 141, 143
camcorder buttons 142
Camcorder icon 141
Camcorder View 141, 143,
150
saving 105
scheduling events for
168, 170, 171
selecting alarm tones for
176
business cards 166, 201
buttons
viewing tasks on 174
Calendar application
changing fonts for 224
changing views for 167
color-coding events 172
creating events 168, 170,
171
camera 138, 143
See also favorite buttons
accessing command 27
changing defaults for 230
customizing 59, 230
disabling 49, 234
troubleshooting 276
camera buttons (Camera
View) 140
Camera icon 139
camera lens 6
Camera View 139, 143, 150
Cancel button (Active Call)
49
highlighted on screen 26
opening applications
with 33
displaying events 74
opening 34, 74
restoring factory defaults
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
305
Index
Cancel Spkr button 49
cancelling menu selection 28
Caps Lock indicator 30
Caps Lock mode 30
captions. See audio captions
Card Info application 219,
220
Chat screen 108
chat sessions 108, 110
Chat view 108
Choose Songs command
161
Change Lock Code option
236
changing
bookmarks 119
Card Info button 219
card readers 157
243
Clear Cache button 126
Clear Cookies button 126
clock 189, 225
See also World Clock
closing
carrying cases 255, 268
cascading style sheets 116,
124, 125
frequency bands 79
information 15
categories
lock codes 236
adding ringtones for 73
applications and 35, 228
beaming and 201, 203
color-coding in 172
contacts and 165
events and 172, 174
memos and 182
naming 228
receiving from Bluetooth
and 200
sending over Bluetooth
connections 198
owner information 241
passwords 237, 241
playlists 162
QuickText phrases 98
screen fonts 224
wallpaper 40
application menus 28
applications 33
pick lists 29
color palette 143
color preferences 110, 143,
web page layouts 115
character entry 30, 31, 32, 98
character limits
227
Color Theme Preferences
screen 227
memos 182
color-codedcategorymarker
174
text messages 98
character searches 191
charge indicator 5, 8, 9
charger cable 8
color-coding events 172
colored backgrounds 26
command buttons 27
commands. See menu items
completed tasks 177, 179,
181
tasks and 178, 180, 181
Category command 228
category marker 174
Category pick list 174, 175,
228
CDs 158
Center button 5
charging
smartphone 7, 8, 11
smartphone battery 8–10
charging status 10
chat icon 108, 112
completion dates 181
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
306
Index
components (Treo
smartphone) 2
conflicting applications 246
connecting
contact names 42
contacts
Compose dialog box 98, 99,
101
application
Compress Day View check
box 174
73
networks 245
to websites 114, 126, 127,
284
compressed files 193, 194
computers
BroadbandAccess
Connect and 127
connecting smartphone
to 15, 21
deleting 166
entering phone numbers
for 52, 60
downloading
connections
looking up 60
applications to 194
installing applications
from 194
changing frequency
bands for 79
marking as private 165
saving 105
messaging preferences
for 110
receiving information
over Bluetooth 200
restrictions for 51
sendinginformationover
Bluetooth 198
setting up Bluetooth 208
troubleshooting 265, 272
TTY devices and 78
unsupported 133
viewing status of 80, 81,
270, 272
scrolling through 25
searching for 42, 74, 166
synchronizing 163, 213,
214
installing
synchronization
software on 19
quarantined files on 16,
19
viewing details about 42
Contacts application
adding events to 171
changing fonts for 224
opening 163
synchronizing with 15, 22
transferring information
to 22
transferring multimedia
to 152
transferring music from
157, 158
synchronizing
information in 22
Contacts button 164
Contacts list 26, 27, 166
contracts 1
Con button (calculator) 188
conduits 168, 261
Conf button 55
conference calls 53, 55, 56
Confirm message deletion
constants 188
consumption factors
conversion functions
(calculator) 187, 188
cookies 121, 125, 126
(battery) 11
Contact Edit dialog box 164,
165
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
307
Index
Copy button 149, 218
Copy command 123, 218
Copy Items dialog box 149
Copy items to pick list 149
Copy to command 149
Copy To pick list 218
copying
282
creating
customizing
calendar 173–175
chat sessions 110
bookmarks 116
categories for
applications 218
multimedia files 152, 153
music files 157
applications 228
chat sessions 108, 110
cities for World Clock 190
contacts 164
messaging options 109
smartphone 138, 173, 221
system date and time 243
system sounds 221–222
tasks 181
phone numbers 40
photos 149
text 123
email 113
user folders 247
events 168, 170
videos 149
memos 182
web browser 124–126
copyrighted materials 148
corporate email accounts 89,
91, 127, 245
multimedia messages
100, 101
D
partnerships 66, 131, 133
passwords 237, 239
playlists 161, 162
private entries 239
QuickText phrases 98, 99
speed-dial buttons 60
tasks 177, 178
daily events 167
corporate groupware
information 213
Daily Repeating Events
check box 175
corporate servers 22
country-specific
daily schedules 167
data. See information
data service icons 270, 272
data services 84, 113, 270,
272
preferences. See
language settings
coupling 266
coverage area 11, 38, 71, 80,
265
text messages 98–99
voice memos 185
wallpaper 150
data transfer 81, 283, 285
databases 191
Coverage in/out pick list 71
crashes 256
Date & Time Preferences
current date and time 189
current events 74
Current Privacy pick list 239,
240
screen 243
Create chats from messages
pick list 110
date formats 225
Create new messages as
date preferences 243
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
308
Index
Date stamp pick list 143
dates
delete confirmation
messages 109
Details command 150
Delete Contact command
adding to photos 143
changing event 173
completed tasks and 177,
181
displaying 167, 189
selecting 168
setting due 178
list 173
devices; smartphone
Dial another call prompt 53
Dial button 44
setting system 243
sorting on 106
albums 150, 151
alerts 83
Dial Extra Digits
Automatically option 61
Dial Number dialog box 44
Dial Pad 31, 40, 74
Dial Pad button 50
Dial Preferences screen 75
dialing 40–44, 50, 60, 75, 123
dialog boxes
synchronizing 243
viewing due 179, 181
datestamps 143
Day display options 174
Day View 167, 174
daylight savings 189
Daylight Savings Time check
box 190
applications 17, 195, 278
bookmarks 119
contacts 166
cookies 126
device names 18
email 277
accessing command
events 173
buttons on 27
favorite buttons 62
files 277
decimal display formats
(calculator) 188
defined 284
getting help with 281
highlighted buttons in 26
digital cameras 145
See also camera
decimal values 188, 225
decompression utilities 194
Default Alarm pick list 176
Default Apps Preferences
screen 231
memos 182
messages 107, 109
music from playlists 162
passwords 237
dimming keyboard backlight
223, 244
photos 140, 150, 151
playlists 162
tasks 180
default settings 230
Default View pick list 173
degrees 188
Disable cookies check box
125
video clips 142, 150, 151
desktop software. See Palm
Desktop software;
software
Disable JavaScript check
delays 238
box 125
Delete command 151, 195,
disabling
196
Add New Number
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
309
Index
prompt 52
Bluetooth devices 11, 67
cookies 125
contacts information 42
due dates 179, 181
183
downloading
Keyguard 37, 232, 233
onscreen buttons 49, 234
synchronization 204
system sounds 221
the touchscreen 232, 234
web page images 116,
124, 125
104, 105
email 86
files 121, 193
86
discovery 200
on-device guide 281
overdue tasks 167
Downloads bookmark 121
downward-pointing arrows
29
Discovery icon 132, 135
discovery results list 135
Discovery Results screen
198, 199
personal calendar 167
photos 138, 143, 145, 152
private entries 240
drafts 98
drained battery icon 10
draining the battery 8, 10, 11
Draw on Photo command
139
discussion groups 282
disk space (smartphone) 277
Display my name in chat
window as entry field 110
Display Options command
173
Quick Tour 281
signal strength 80
slide shows 147
drawing tools 139
drivers 211
Due Date pick list 178
due dates 177, 178, 181
dummy expansion card 215,
216
tasks 174, 179, 181
unread messages 82, 174
video clips 143, 146, 152
video recording time 141
voicemail messages 81
web addresses 124
web pages 114, 116
DOC files 183
Display Options dialog box
173, 174
displaying
alerts 83
E
application information
196
earpiece 5, 49
eBooks 17
echoes 266
documentation 2, 24, 281
Documents application 183–
184
Documents button 184
Documents To Go icon 183
Documents To Go software
application menus 28
applications 228, 229
bookmarks 118
Edit Bookmark List dialog
box 119
connection status 80, 81,
270, 272
Edit Bookmarks command
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
310
Index
119
214
Edit Favorites Button
command 62
74, 235
URLs 124
Edit Favorites Pages
command 59, 61
Edit Playlist dialog box 161,
162
viewing unread
erasing information 256
error messages 280
errors 259, 267, 280
Escalate ring tone volume
check box 69
edit screens 27
editing. See changing
Effects pick list 143
email
messages for 82, 174
273
emergency calls 76, 81, 235
emoticons 99
empty battery icon 10
empty time slots 174
Enable background play
check box 161
Enable Voice Privacy check
box 77
encryption 76, 121
Eng(x) display format 188
engineering notation 188
entering
accessing 84, 127, 245
adding multiple
addresses to 61
attaching photos to 138,
140, 148
attaching videos to 142,
148
EVDO broadband
technology 284
event conflicts 174
Event Details dialog box 169,
171, 172, 173
attaching voice memos
to 186
events
checking 82
creating 113
changing 173
color-coding 172
creating 168, 170
deleting 173
defining favorite buttons
for 61
alternate characters 31,
32
deleting 277
displaying 74, 167, 173,
175
dialing from 44
downloading 86
leaving on server 88
requirements for 1, 3
retrieving 82
decimal values 188, 225
device names 18, 65, 256
events 168, 170, 171
information 15, 241
lock codes 235
numbers 31, 187
passkeys 65, 66, 132, 135
scheduling repeating 171
setting alarms for 169,
176
synchronizing 167, 213,
scrolling through 25
selecting default
application for 231
214
troubleshooting 263–264
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
311
Index
viewing categories of 174
viewing duration of 174
Evolution Data Optimized
(EVDO) technology 284
Excel spreadsheets 183
Exchange Address Book 261
Exchange Servers. See
Microsoft Exchange
Servers
opening files on 184
renaming 219
4–6
feedback 266
fields 25, 29
viewing information
about 219
pictures 145
videos 146
files
80
Extra Digits button (Active
Call View) 50
Extra Digits option (Add
Favorites) 61
browsing 217
deleting 277
expansion card slot 4, 215,
216
expansion cards
downloading 121, 193
moving to expansion
cards 17
accessing items on 217
adding 215
beaming from 202
caution for 16, 220
copying applications to
218, 219
copying music to 157
copying photos or videos
to 149
deleting applications on
195
displaying albums on 145
downloading to 121
formatting 219, 220
inserting 216
opening 184
saving 184
F
streaming 122
fade setting 174
Fast Mode (web browser)
116, 125
favorite buttons
adding 59–61
transferring 16, 277
Files application 217
financial calculator 187
financial functions 188
Find dialog box 191
Find More button 191
Find Text on Page command
124
defined 284
deleting 62
dialing with 43
displaying 43
finding
editing 62
chat sessions 108
contacts 42, 74, 166
specific characters 191
text 124, 191
organizing 61, 62
specifying number of 74
transferring to
installing applications on
194
managing files on 217
moving files to 17
opening applications on
217, 277
smartphone 59
web pages 114
Favorites pages 43, 59, 61, 74
features (Treo smartphone)
firewalls 245
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
312
Index
5-way navigator 5, 24, 25,
234
Fixed display format 188
Flash mode 55, 56
flight mode 38
Float display format 188
folders 106, 107, 257, 261
Font command 113
Font size pick list 224
fonts 113, 224
78
gradients 188
help 279, 281
grouping photos or videos
145
hiding
H
information in entry
screens 239
hands-free devices
adding 67, 68
forgetting passwords 87,
237, 241
finding compatible 63, 65
passkeys and 66
RF emissions and 291
troubleshooting 268–269
Hands-free Preferences
screen 68
Hands-free Setup button 66
Hang Up All button 49
hanging up phone 49, 50, 53,
55
hard resets 237, 251
hardware 2
Pics&Videos toolbar 147
private entries 239
web browser toolbar 122
High Priority command 99
high speed data transfer 283
highlighted buttons 26
highlighting
Format Card command 220
Formats Preferences screen
225
formatting
expansion cards 219
formatting expansion cards
219, 220
applications 34, 35
favorite buttons 43
items in pick lists 29
items on screen 25, 26
menu items 28
phone numbers 44
text 27, 123
forums 282
forwarding phone calls 57
freeing disk space
(smartphone) 277
freeing memory 126, 195,
277
headphones 153
headset button 46, 64
headset jack 6
freezes 246, 250
web links 26, 115
hints 237
History command 123
History list 123
Hold button 50, 53
holidays 171
home city 189
frequency bands 79
From pick list 218
full charge (battery) 8
headsets
Bluetooth devices and
65, 67, 133
connecting to
G
smartphone 63–64
receiving calls and 46, 49,
Game Volume pick list 222
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
313
Index
home page 124
54, 234
home page icon 116, 124
HotSync Manager 210, 211,
284
defined 284
16
indicator light 5, 8, 9
information
HotSync Manager icon 210,
258
HotSync Setup button 209
HotSync technology 284
hypertext links. See web
links
258
216
installer 192
installing
accessing 237
backing up 16, 22, 251
beaming 201
changing 15
entering 15, 30–31, 241
erasing all 256
hard resets and 237
losing 220, 237, 251
marking as private 239–
240
masking 232, 239
protecting 232, 237
receiving over Bluetooth
connections 200
sending over Bluetooth
connections 198
storing 16, 215, 277
synchronizing 15, 19, 22,
204–214, 261
applications 192–194,
247, 285
bonus software 23, 192
Palm Desktop software
16, 194, 248
smartphone battery 7
synchronizationsoftware
15, 19
third-party applications
277
I
icons 114, 229
Ignore button 46
Ignore with Text button 46
image file types 100, 121,
145
images
disabling web page 116,
124, 125
downloading 121
saving 105, 121
selecting as wallpaper 74
sending 100, 102
transferring 17, 277
troubleshooting 275
uploading 101
VPN clients 245
VZAccess Manager
software 127
interference 267, 269
international characters. See
alternate characters
international clock. See
World Clock
international settings. See
language settings
Internet 38, 193
See also web browsing;
websites
IMAP servers 88
importing phone numbers
178
Inbox 26, 108, 112
incoming messages 111, 112
transferring 16, 22, 201
updating 15, 22
infrared port
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
314
Index
Internet connections 114,
126, 127, 284
illustrated 30
from 42
troubleshooting 272
Internet email accounts 86
interruptions 280
Into album pick list 149
invalid characters 98
IR port
locking 232
voice memos 186
See also battery
restoring factory defaults
230
244
Keyguard 232, 233
screen 233, 234
Known Caller pick list 70
beaming from 201, 203
defined 284
274
location of 4
Local button 210
synchronizing with 211,
local weather reports 87
locating
258
L
items in pick lists 29
items on screen
activating 26
chat sessions 108
contacts 42, 74, 166
specific characters 191
text 124, 191
Label color pick list 110
language selection screen 7,
20
language settings 225, 248,
251
laptops 210, 211
large attachments 277
length functions 188
liability ii
lightning bolt icons 10, 82
Li-Ion battery 285
See also battery
links 104
highlighting 25, 26
selecting 26
iTunes 153, 156, 159
web pages 114
Location icon 77, 81
Location On option 77
locations,disabling/enabling
transmission of 76, 77
Lock & Turn Off option 237
lock codes 235
J
Java applets 121
JavaScript elements 125
JPG files 145
Lock Device dialog box 238
lock icon 115, 148, 199, 201
locking
K
keyboard
See also web links
list screens
accessing alternate
characters on 31
dialing with 41
entering information
from 30–31
keyboard 232
phone 235–236
See also pick lists
accessing command
buttons on 27
touch-sensitive features
234
Treo smartphone 237,
highlighting items in 26
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
315
Index
238
See also notes
logging in to corporate
servers 245
212, 258, 259
logic functions 188
looking up contacts 60
Lookup button 60
loops 250
Memos application
entering text in 182
opening 34, 182
removing memos with
182
losing
information 220, 237, 251
passwords 87, 237, 241
Lost Password option 241
Lotus Domino servers 213
Lotus Notes 213
magnet 6
mail. See email
mail servers 86, 88
Manage Playlists command
161, 162
map (World Clock) 189
maps (web pages) 275
marking information as
private 239–240
marking private contacts 165
Mask Records option 239
masks 232, 239
mathematical constants 188
mathematical functions 188
maximizing battery life 11,
38, 244
media features 11
Media Player 153, 157, 158
memory 126, 173, 277
freeing 195, 277
memory slots (calculator)
188
memos
synchronizing
information in 22
Memos button 182
Memos list 27
low coverage areas 265
lowercase letters 30
M
Menu button 5
menu items 28
Menu key 28, 30
menu shortcuts 28
menus 28
M4V files 146
Mac operating systems
removing applications
and 196
Mac systems
Message command 45
message icons 112
message lists 108
Message Tone pick list 111
messages
installing applications
from 194
installing
synchronization
software on 20
installing to expansion
cards and 194
See also multimedia
messages; text
messages
listening to music and
153
requirements for 15
synchronization defaults
adding graphical
elements to 100
adding multiple
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
316
Index
recipients for 61
arranging in folders 106
chat sessions and 108
checking status of 81, 82
creating 98, 100, 101
defining favorite buttons
for 61
creating chat sessions
85, 86, 163, 167, 213
See Documents
application
Outlook
creating multimedia
with 98
Microsoft Windows. See
Windows systems
Microsoft Word documents
183
deleting 107, 109
dialing from 44
displaying status of 112
displaying unread 82, 174
including in alerts 109
invalid characters in 98
memory consumption
and 277
deleting messages in 107
opening 34
minutes usage information
(phone) 58
overview 97
mirror 6
sorting messages in 106
status indicators for 112
viewing multimedia
messages in 105
MMS messaging services
97, 271, 285
paging from 97
previewing 102
See also multimedia
messages
messaging applications 231
Messaging button 5, 33, 34
Messaging Inbox 26, 108
messaging preferences 109–
111
messaging services 1, 97,
270
messaging, troubleshooting
270–271
metric values 188
microphone 6, 50, 143
Microphone pick list 143
Microsoft Excel
spreadsheets 183
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 214
receiving 103, 110
retrieving 48, 81, 82
saving 98
scrolling through 25
selectingphonenumbers
in 44
sending 45, 97, 112
setting colors for 110
setting preferences for
109–111
mobile networks 38, 265
modems 127, 284
monitoring phone status 80
Month display options 175
Month View 167, 175
Move to command 149
moving
bookmarks 120
favorite buttons 62
moving around on screen 24
moving through web pages
115, 125
specifying priority
settings for 99, 101
troubleshooting 270, 271
Messages page
MP3 files 157
MP3 formats 153
MP4 files 146
(Preferences) 109
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
317
Index
MPEG-4 formats 152
MPG files 146
multi-connector pin 6
multimedia file types 146
multimedia files 100, 145
multimedia message icons
112
viewing 104, 105
Multimedia Messaging
music
naming
sessions 110
photo albums 139
photo groups 144
playlists 161
multimedia messages
See also Messaging
application
addressing 101
video albums 141
voice memos 185, 186
NationalAccess connections
130, 274
troubleshooting 272
NationalAccess icon 114
NationalAccess technology
80, 81, 285
navigator buttons 5, 24, 25
See also 5-way navigator
Network page (Preferences)
110
adjusting volume 160
answering phone calls
and 46
changing playlists for 162
creating playlists for 161,
162
downloading 121
listening to 63, 153, 160
memory consumption
and 277
pausing 160
playing 122, 160, 161
selecting 160
stopping 161
uploading 157
attaching photos to 138,
140, 148
attaching videos to 142,
148
attaching voice memos
to 186
checking status of 82
creating 100, 101
deleting 107
dialing from 44
displaying details of 105
memory consumption
and 277
network preferences 110
networks 38, 265, 272
New Bookmark dialog box
116
playing 104, 105
previewing 102
requirements for 3
retrieving 82, 103
selecting alert tones for
111
music file types 121
music files 153, 157, 277
mute button 50
New button 27
Next Song button 160
No Service message 12, 38,
80
N
selecting text in 105
sending 97, 102
NormalMode (web browser)
116, 125
names
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
318
Index
Note button 165
notes
files 184
22, 205, 261
Wireless Sync
See also memos
adding to contact
information 165
adding to events 173
adding to tasks 178
scrolling through 25
storing 182
Outlook folders 261
overdue tasks 167, 174, 179
owner information 241
241, 242
notifications 48
See also alerts
number formats 225
numbers
operating system
(smartphone) 16
P
operating systems (PCs) 15
Optimized Mode (web
browser) 114, 115
Option key 30, 31, 33, 285
Option key indicator 31
Option Lock indicator 31
Option Lock mode 31, 98
options in pick lists 29
organizer features 11
Outbox 112
page icon 112
Page View 118, 123, 124
paging 97
paired relationship. See
partnerships
Palm Desktop software
defined 285
calculator display
options for 188
entering from keyboard
31, 187
O
device names in 284
entering information
with 15
forgetting passwords
and 241
installing 16, 194, 248
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync and 214
multiple appointments
and 167
multiple contacts and 163
reinstalling 262
offline synchronization 262
offline viewing (web) 118
OK button 27
outgoing messages 112
outgoing phone calls 53
Outlook
online forums 282
online support 281
opening
duplicate entries in 262
entering information
with 15
Alert screen 83
application menus 28
applications 5, 33, 34, 51,
217
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync and 214
multiple appointments
and 167
Bookmarks View 118
Call Log 45
Dial Pad 40, 50, 74
synchronizing with 22,
258
multiple contacts and 163
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
319
Index
time zones and 168
troubleshooting 248, 258
upgrades and 18
Wireless Sync
pasting
synchronizing with 15, 22
to 22
transferring multimedia
text 123
to 152
157, 158
application and 214
Palm Device name 198
PALM folder 139, 141
Palm online support 281
Palm OS software 16
Palm OS-compatible
applications 192, 193
Palm Software Installation
CD 2, 19
paragraphs, selecting 27
partial battery icon 10
partnerships 66, 131, 133,
285
pausing
237, 241
video playback 141, 146
video recording 141
voice memos 185, 186
PCs. See personal
computers
personal information
managers 248, 286
personal schedules 167
personalizing smartphone
138, 173, 221
PDB (Palm OS) databases
See also preferences
phone
192, 193
PDF files 183
answering 46, 49
Bluetooth devices and 67
changing frequency
bands 79
conference calls and 55
dialing 40–44, 50, 60, 123
dialing preferences for 75
documentation
conventions for 36
getting started with 12
hands-free devices and
65, 66, 67, 68
passkeys 65, 66, 132, 135
Password box 237, 241
password hints 237
passwords
pending alerts 103
pending messages 108, 112
personal computers
BroadbandAccess
Connect and 127
connecting smartphone
to 15, 21
caution for 239
changing 237, 241
deleting 237
dialing 50, 61
downloading
applications to 194
installing applications
from 194
email and 87, 95
entering 48
forgetting 87, 237, 241
owner information and
241
installing
synchronization
software on 19
quarantined files on 16,
19
hanging up 49, 50, 53, 55
locking 235–236
maximizing battery life
and 38
private entries and 232,
239
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
320
Index
privacy settings for 76
selecting alert tones for
70, 71
connections 78
Phone Call screen 46
Phone Lock command 235
phone numbers
adding 52
selecting ringtones for
69, 70
service carrier for 1
silencing ringer for 46,
221
See also phone; phone
71, 266
troubleshooting 265–268
turning on and off 36, 38
viewing Call Log for 45
viewing minutes usage
for 58
copying 40
disabling screen for 234
encrypting 77
ending 49, 50, 53, 55
forwarding 57
keyboard backlight and
30
making 40, 50, 53, 55
placing on hold 50, 53, 54
receiving 46, 54
restrictions for 51
running applications and
51
sending to voicemail 46
switching between active
54, 56
text messages and 104
transmitting location
during 76
viewing details about 49,
58
creating speed-dial
buttons for 60
dialing extra digits with
50, 61
viewing status of 80
Phone application
accessing Dial Pad in 40,
50, 74
entering 40–44, 74, 235
getting device 14
highlighting 26
adding caller IDs 72, 73
customizing 74
dialing from 45, 60
displaying events in 173
enabling privacy settings
from 76
importing 178
pasting into Dial Pad 40
redialing most recent 45
saving 52
selecting 44, 45
phone off icon 80
Phone Off message 12, 38,
80
phone on icon 80
Phone Preferences
command 76
Phone Preferences screen
76, 78
phone-off icon 38
photo albums 139, 145, 149,
finding contacts from 42
opening 34, 39
overview 36
selecting wallpaper for
74, 150
selecting wireless bands
from 79
setting alert tones 70
setting ringtones 69
setting TTY/TDD
viewing status of 53
phone indicator. See
indicator light
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
321
Index
150
160
Photo Settings screen 143
photos
playback
playing
pick lists 26, 29
adding as wallpaper 150
adding caller ID 72, 165
adding captions to 139,
140
adding to albums 150
adding to contacts 150
attaching to multimedia
messages 102
backing up 152
copying 149
deleting 140, 151
displaying information
about 150
Pics&Videos application
creating wallpaper with
150
opening 145
organizing media with
150
removing photos or
videos from 151
rotating photos in 151
sending pictures or
videos from 148
synchronizing
information in 22
viewing pictures in 145
viewing slide shows in
147
multimedia messages
104, 105
music 122, 160, 161
streamed content 122
video clips 142, 146
voice captions 145
voice memos 186
playlists 161–162
Playlists command 161
plug-ins 121
Pocket Tunes application
changing playlists in 162
creating playlists in 161
opening 157
downloading 121
grouping 145
personalizing 139
positioning on screen
145
removing from albums
150, 151
viewing videos in 146
Pics&Videos icon 145
picture formats 145
Picture list 148
pictures 72, 105, 138, 276
See also images; photos
PIM applications 286
PIMs 248
rotating 151
overview 153, 157
playing music from 160,
161
saving 140
scrolling through 25
selecting as backgrounds
174
POP servers 88
ports 21
Power Preferences screen
11, 244
Power/End button 5, 37, 38
PowerPoint files 183
sending 138, 140, 148
setting default size 143
setting preferences for
143
Pix Place 286
Pix Place accounts 101
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
322
Index
PPT files 183
presentations 184
PRC (Palm OS) applications
Q
192, 193
precautions 298
preferences
pressing onscreen buttons
primary button assignments
230
prioritizing tasks 178, 181
priority levels 178, 181
priority settings 99, 101
privacy flag 178
Privacy Mode check box 109
privacy settings 76
private entries 232, 239–240,
241
programs. See applications
progress indicatorbar(video
recording) 141
Prompt sounds pick list 143
protecting personal
information 232, 237
protecting the screen 5, 255
protecting Treo smartphone
232–242
alarm tones 176
alert tones 70
applications 229, 231
buttons 230
281
QuickText phrases 98, 99
calculator 188
camcorder 143
camera 143
R
country-specific 225
dialing 75
radians 188
radio frequency emissions
hands-free devices 68
Keyguard 233
messaging 109–111
owner information 241
power settings 244
ringtones 69
system colors 227
system date and time 243
system sounds 222
tasks 181
288
random number generator
188
range (Bluetooth devices)
198
Rcl button (calculator) 188
readjusting the screen 226
receipts (messaging) 109
receiving phone calls 46, 54
recently viewed web page
icon 116
rechargeable battery 2
See also battery
rechargeable battery. See
battery
web pages 124–126
prefixes (phone numbers) 75
Prefs icon 241
preinstalled applications
192, 195, 281
See also applications;
specific application
presentation modules 215
proxy servers 126
pTunes icon 157
punctuation marks 31, 32
Purge command 107, 173
Purge pick list 107
Record command 201
Record Completion Date
check box 181
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
323
Index
Record new option 102
recorder 185
bookmarks 119
recording
sounds 176
videos 102, 141
cookies 126
resets 246, 249–251, 267, 280
email 277
voice memos 185
Records button 197
recovering lost passwords
241
recurring events. See
repeating events
Redial List screen 45
redialing most recent
number 45
redirector (websites) 273
reducing storage space 17
Refresh command 273
Refresh icon (web pages)
116
expansion cards 216
Resolution pick list 143
138
restoring factory defaults
230
restricting location
information 76
resuming playback 122, 160
Return key 30
Review photos/videos pick
list 143
memos 182
messages 107, 109
music from playlists 162
passwords 237
photos 140, 150, 151
playlists 162
tasks 180
video clips 142, 150, 151
Rename Card command 219
Rename Memo command
186
renaming expansion cards
219
RF emissions 288
ringer
refreshing web pages 116,
273
Regulatory Information 287
reinstalling Palm Desktop
software 262
adjusting volume 72
silencing 46
turning off 222
Ringer switch 4, 38, 46, 221
ringtone file types 100, 121
Ringtone pick list 73
ringtone preferences 69
ringtones
repeat intervals (events) 171
Repeat pick list 171, 176, 178
repeating alarms 176
repeating event icon 171
repeating events 171, 175
repeating tasks 178
replacing smartphone
battery 7, 252
reinstalling third-party
applications 247, 251
Reminder Sound pick list 176
reminders 169, 177
Remove from album
command 150
assigning to caller IDs 73,
165
downloading 69, 121
sending with messages
removing
albums 150, 151
alerts 83
Request Receipts pick list
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
324
Index
100, 102
setting phone 69, 70
roaming icon 80
Roaming message 80
Roaming pick list 70
Rotate command 151
rotating photos 151
SD cards 215, 299
searching for
171
screen
contacts 42, 74, 166
S
accessing command
safety 287
34
secure connections 133
secure web pages 115
secure websites 121, 275
security 66, 241
activating items on 26
adjusting brightness 223,
244
Save As command 184
Save as Contact command
150
aligning 226
Save as Wallpaper
command 150
automatically turning off
37, 244
Save List button 161
Save Page command 118
Save Picture command 105
Save Sound command 105
saved web page indicator
118
See also passwords;
privacy settings
battery life and 11
disabling 49, 232, 234
locking 234
Security button 237, 239
security certificates 121
Security command 240
Security dialog box 237
security software 232
Select Band command 79
Select Band dialog box 79
Select Font dialog box 224
selecting
moving around on 24
protecting 5, 255
scrolling through 25
selecting items on 26, 29
troubleshooting 254–255
turning on or off 36, 37,
244, 268
saving
calendars 105
contact information 105
files 184
images 105, 121
messages 98
phone numbers 52
photos 140
playlists 161
video clips 142
voice memos 185
waking up 37, 49
screen fonts 224
screen protectors 255
scroll bars 25
scrolling 25, 115
scrolling preferences 125
alarm tones 176
applications 34, 35, 217
chat sessions 108
dates 168
favorite buttons 43
home city 189
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
325
Index
items in pick lists 29
items on screen 26
menu items 28
service providers 80, 84, 94
Show Favorite buttonscheck
box 74
Show Messages check box
music 160
setting
phone numbers 44, 45
photo albums 145, 148
playlists 161
Show Priorities check box
181
Show Time Bars check box
Show timestamps in chats
check box 110
Show Wallpaper option 74
Shutter sounds pick list 143
Side button 5, 153, 185, 230
Signal faded pick list 71
signal strength 71, 80, 265,
266, 267
signal strength indicator 38
signal-strength icon 38
silencing system sounds 46,
221
134, 208
songs 160
text 27, 105, 125
time zones 168
video albums 146, 148
wallpaper 74, 150
web links 115
Setup Devices dialog box 66,
209
Shift/Find indicator 30
Shift/Find key 30, 191
Short Messaging Service
(SMS) 286
self-portrait mirror 6
Send button 5, 45
Send command 198, 199
Send From pick list 199
Send To Device droplet 158
sending
shortcuts 28, 35
Show Address Bar check box
124
applications over
Bluetooth 199
calls to voicemail 46
email 104, 113
information over
Bluetooth 198
Show Calendar event check
box 74, 173
silencing the ringer 46
silent alarm 69, 71, 176
silent alerts 111
Show Categories check box
181
Show Category Column
check box 174
Show Category List check
box 174, 175
single carrier (1xRTT) radio
transmission technology
283
messages 45, 97, 112
photos 138, 140, 148
to chat rooms 108
video clips 138, 142, 148
voice memos 186
Sent folder 112
SIT files 193, 194
Show Completed Items
check box 181
Size button 17, 197
slide show options 147
slide shows 147
Show Due Dates check box
177, 181
slider 25
slides 100, 286
servers 22, 86, 88, 245
Show Due Tasks check box
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
326
Index
Slideshow Setting
command 147
resetting 237, 249–251
setting up 7
specifications for 299
281
synchronization defaults
smartphone
synchronizing
information and 19, 20
uninstalling 259
activating 12
adding additional
security for 241
as wireless modem 127,
284
songs. See music
Sort by check box 181
Sort by Date command 106
Sort by Name command 106
Sort command 106
sorting messages 106
sorting tasks 181
Sound & Alerts Preferences
screen 176, 222
sound clips 100, 102
Sound icon 105
Sound Off position (ringer)
46, 221
Sound On position (ringer)
221
battery life for 11
charging 7, 8, 11
components of 2
connecting Bluetooth
devices to 133, 134, 136
connecting to PCs 21
customizing 138, 173, 221
documentation
conventions for 36
features illustrated 4–6
freeing memory for 195,
277
freeing space for 277
getting help with 281–282
getting phone number
for 14
hands-free devices
compatible with 65
headsets compatible
with 63
turning on and off 7
unauthorized users and
232
unsupported
connections for 133
updating information on
15, 22
viewing signal strength
for 80
SMS messaging services
270, 286
See also text messages
soft resets 203, 249
software
See also Palm Desktop
software
accessing from web
browser 121
included with
smartphone 2
installing 23, 192
managing 183
sound preferences 176
sounds 100, 176, 221
Sounds button 222
Space key 30
speaker 6
speakerphone 11, 49, 51
troubleshooting 266
locking 237, 238
naming 18, 65, 256
overview 1
preset buttons on 59
protecting 232–242
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
327
Index
special characters 31, 32, 98
specifications 299
speech-impaired services 78
speed-dialing buttons 43, 60
Spkr-phone button 49
spreadsheets 183
submitting web forms 115
synchronizing
with Bluetooth devices
208, 210
256
Start With pick list 118
static 267, 269
statistical functions 188
statistical information 196
status icons (phone) 80–82
stereo adapters 63, 153
stereo headphones 153
stereo headsets 63
Sto button (calculator) 188
stopping
133
device names and 18
preparing for 15
system colors 227
system dates and time 189,
243
system errors 259, 267, 280
system requirements (PCs)
15
system resets 246, 250, 267,
280
system sounds 46, 221–222
System Volume pick list 222
recommendations for 22
removing applications
and 195, 196
selecting applications for
multimedia playback 105
music playback 161
video recording 141
voice memo playback
186
204–207
setting default
application for 230
troubleshooting 256–264
upgrading and 18
synchronizationapplications
(third-party) 251, 256, 261
synchronization software 15,
19, 248
storage space 17
storing
T
Take new picture option 102
Take new video option 102
taking pictures 139, 276
Tap and Drag check box 125
tapping 24, 25, 26, 29, 255
Task Details dialog box 178
tasks
information 16, 215, 277
music files 157
notes 182
photos 139
smartphone 5, 6
videos 141
synchronizing
Calendar events 167, 213,
214
contacts 163, 213, 214
dates and time 243
email 85, 213, 214
information 15, 19, 22,
streaming files 122
style sheets 116, 124, 125
stylus 4, 24, 25, 29
See also events; Tasks
application
adding 177, 178
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
328
Index
checking off 179
deleting 180
text
copying 123
installing 247, 277
displaying 167, 174, 179,
finding 124, 191
selecting 27, 105, 125
181
marking as private 178
prioritizing 178, 181
setting alarms for 178,
181
cards 17
troubleshooting 24, 246,
setting preferences for
181
viewing due dates for
179, 181
third-party VPN client
software 245
three-way calling 53, 55, 56
Thumbnail View 145, 148,
151
text fields 25, 29
text message icon 112
text messages
Tasks application
changing fonts for 224
opening 34, 177
synchronizing
information in 22
Tasks button 177
Tasks list 26, 167, 178, 179,
181
Tasks Preferences screen
181
TDD devices 78
technical support (Palm) 281
technical support (Verizon)
282
See also messages
addressing 98
checking status of 81, 82
containing links 104
creating 98–99
deleting 107
dialing from 44
requirements for 3
retrieving 82, 103
selecting alert tones for
111
TIF files 145
time
displaying video
recording 141
scheduling events and
168, 173
setting system 243
synchronizing 243
viewing 189
sending 46, 97, 99, 103
setting priority of 99
special characters and 98
troubleshooting 270
text messaging service 1
Text Telephone devices 78
third-party applications
caution for 230
time bars 174
time formats 225
time preferences 243
time slots (calendar) 174
Time Zone pick list 168
time zones 168, 243, 263
Timed Events check box 175
timestamps 110
telecommunications devices
78
telephone calls. See phone;
phone calls
temperature conversions
188
temporary passwords 87
compatibility with 16
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
329
Index
tips 1, 281
Tips command 281
Tips icon 281
to do items. See tasks
toolbars 122, 147
touchscreen. See screen
Touchscreen Preferences
screen 226
transmitting location 76
travel alarm 190
Treo 700p smartphone. See
smartphone
images 101
Typing starts contacts
search option 74
uppercase letters 30
URLs 104, 124
USB hub 21
U
USB ports 21
Use color for pick list 110
user discussion groups 282
user folders 246, 257, 286
User Guide 281
uninstalling
Palm desktop software
259
third-party applications
250
trigonometric functions 188
troubleshooting 246, 281
Trusted Device list 133, 137,
200
usernames 95
Unknown Caller pick list 70
unlocking
the keyboard 232
the phone 235, 236
Treo smartphone 237
unread messages 82, 112,
174
untimed events 170, 171, 175
Untimed Events check box
175
updates 247
updating
information 15, 22
system date and time 189
upgrades 16–19, 59, 259
troubleshooting 246–247
uploading
V
trusted devices 133
See also partnerships
Trusted Devices button 131,
134
Verizon Wireless
customer service for 282
preset buttons and 59
smartphone
Trusted Pairs. See
requirements for 1
technical support for 282
troubleshooting Internet
connections and 273
voicemail services and 47
Verizon Wireless onscreen
message 80
partnerships
TTY devices 78
TTY icon 78
TTY Mode pick list 78
TTY/TDD Mode icon 81
turning on or off
Caps Lock 30
VersaMail application
accessing email and 84,
269
keyboard backlight 30
Keyguard 37, 232, 233
microphone 143
documentation for 277
overview 93
phone 36, 38
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
330
Index
setting up accounts for
93, 95, 96
sending 138, 142, 148
143
slide shows 147
Version button 197
version numbers 197
Vibrate pick list 69, 71, 176
vibrating alarm 69, 71, 176
video albums 141, 145, 149,
150
video file types 100, 121, 146
video recording screen 141
Video Settings screen 143
videos
video clips 143, 146, 152
virtual private networks
(VPNs) 127, 245
alerts 83
application information
196
adding to albums 150
adjusting volume for 142
attaching to email 142
attaching to multimedia
messages 100
backing up 152
copying 149
default formats for 152
deleting 142, 151
displaying information
about 150
application menus 28
applications 228, 229
bookmarks 118
Visibility pick list 137, 200
voice captions
adding 139, 140, 150
background music and
147
connection status 80, 81,
270, 272
contacts information 42
current date and time 189
due dates 179, 181
error messages 280
event categories 174
events 74, 167, 173, 175
favorite buttons 43, 59
items in pick lists 29
multimedia messages
104, 105
on-device guide 281
overdue tasks 167
personal calendar 167
photos 138, 143, 145, 152
private entries 240
playing 145
Voice Memo application
185–186
Voice Memo button 185
Voice Memo list 186
voice memos 102, 185, 186
Voice Privacy icon 77, 81
voice quality 266
downloading 121
grouping 145
jumping to specific
voicemail
sections of 141
checking 81
pausing 141, 146
retrieving messages 48,
playing 122, 142, 146
recording 102, 141
removing from albums
150, 151
81
sending calls to 46
setting alert tones for 71
setting up 47
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
331
Index
Voicemail Alert pick list 71
Voicemail button 47
Voicemail icon 48, 81
voicemail page icon 112
Voicemail screen 48
volume
web browser
and 278
auto-completion options
for 125
dialing phone numbers
from 44, 123
hiding toolbar in 122
installing applications
from 193
opening 34, 114
overview 113, 114
restrictions for 121
selecting default views
for 118
selecting home page for
124
streamed content and
122
troubleshooting 273
unsupported elements
for 273
selecting default
application for 231
web browsing service 1
web forms 115
alarm tones 176
alert tones 70
music 160
phone 13, 71, 266
ringer 72
ringtones 69
video clips 142
Web icon 114
web links
assigning to favorite
buttons 61
creating email from 113
highlighting 26
Palm online support 281
selecting 115
voice memos 186
Volume button 5, 13, 71
volume conversions
(calculator) 188
Volume pick list 69, 70
volume preferences 222
VPN client software 245
VZAccess Manager icon 129
VZAccess Manager software
127
web pages
accessing 113, 116, 273
bookmarking 116–120
caching 126, 278
changing fonts for 113,
224
changing layouts for 115
copying text from 123
dialing from 44
disabling images for 116,
124, 125
displaying 114, 116
finding text on 124
loading 125, 274
VZAccess Manager window
130
W
web browser application.
See Blazer web browser;
web browser
waking up screen 37, 49
wallpaper 40, 74, 150
warranty 2
web browser icons 116
web browsing
weather reports 87
web addresses 116, 124
See also web browser
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
332
Index
locating most recent 114
opening from text
messages 104
Wide Page Mode 115
removing applications
Windows systems
86, 89, 91
overview 85
synchronizing with 213,
256
opening History list for
123
refreshing 116, 273
saving 118
wizards 192
scrolling 115, 125
selecting text on 123, 125
sending email from 113
setting initial view for 124
setting preferences for
124–126
cards and 194
153
requirements for 15
synchronization defaults
for 22
synchronizing with 205,
211, 258, 259
Word documents 183
word searches 191
words, selecting 27
World Clock 189–190
World Clock icon 189
world map 189
viewing offline 118
websites
Wrap Search check box 124
accessing 113, 116, 121,
126, 275
displaying addresses for
124
displaying recently
visited 114, 116
downloading files from
121
entering addresses for
116
transferring music from
153, 158
X
XLS files 183
user folders on 246, 247
wireless accounts. See
accounts; Verizon
Wireless
wireless band selection 79
wireless connections 198,
199
wireless devices. See
Bluetooth devices hands-
free devices; smartphone
wireless features 11, 130,
278
wireless modems 127, 284
Wireless Sync application
accessing email and 84,
Y
Year View 167
Z
ZIP files 193, 194
zoom settings (camera) 139
opening Palm online
support 281
redirectors and 273
transactions and 275
Week View 167
weekly events 167
weight conversions 188
Welcome CD 2
Using Your Treo 700P Smartphone
333
|